Home

Instruction Manual - Galco Industrial Electronics

1. 8 4 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad 8 4 8 2 3 Data transmission specifications 8 5 8 3 Common Specifications cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 8 6 8 4 Terminal Specifications cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 8 4 1 Terminal functions x5 0c6shecesatusceter ee Genvedenssncbce 8 8 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad 8 9 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal COMUMANGS so toaveieerdtenda cts aaurcincdatadcneteateed 8 10 8 5 External Dimensions cccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 12 8 5 1 Standard models cccccccccsseeeeseeeeeeees 8 12 8 5 2 DC Teacioratscmicsca ke eeelae ieee 8 15 8 5 3 Multi function Keypad ee 8 16 8 6 Protective Functions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 17 Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND ORTIONS chee ae ee leeine Seid R 9 1 Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 1 10 1 Conformity with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL listed for Canada 0 10 1 10 1 1 General oma ee ae oee e eet EEES 10 1 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product certified by UL or cUL 10 1 10 2 Conformity with EU Directives cee 10 1 10 3 Conformity with Low Voltage Directive 10 1 UO Set General nora es ase atl eater acter cde e S 10 1 10 3 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product in co
2. The inverter connected here is The inverter connected subject to the harmonics here is not subject to the regulation If the harmonics harmonics regulation flowing into the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 10 1 Connection to Power Line 10 4 2 Conformity with the harmonics regulation A general purpose industrial inverter is not a product in conformity with EN61000 3 2 A14 When you connect it to a low voltage commercial power supply you must obtain permission of the local power supplier See the case of User A or B in Figure 10 1 above If you need harmonic current data of the inverter consult your Fuji Electric representative 10 2 10 5 Conformity with the EMC Directive in the EU 10 5 1 General The CE Marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore it is the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to ensure that the equipment including the product inverter or connected with it actually complies with the standard and to put a CE Marking as the equipment In general the user s equipment comprises a variety of products supplied from a number of manufacturers in addition to Fuji inverters Therefore the manufacturer of the final equipment needs to take responsibility for conformity In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above it is necessa
3. ate OF F gt Ready to Run 2 5 _ I Waiting for Run command Run command ON ON 4 Restart t No Power 1 1 1 1 State of the Inverter 5 35 Ce When the power is recovered the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run command However if the allowable momentary power failure time H16 elapses after the power failure was recognized even within the 2 seconds the waiting time for a run command is canceled The inverter will start operation in the normal stating sequence If a coast to stop command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply applied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure by detecting an undervoltage condition whereby the voltage of the DC link bus goes below the lower limit In a configuration where a magnetic contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter the inverter may fail to recognize a momentary power failure because the momentary power failure shuts down the operating power of the magnetic contactor causing the contactor circuit to open When the contactor circuit is open the inverter is cut off from the motor and load and the voltage drop in the DC link bus is not great enough to be recognized as a power failure In such an eve
4. 4 Select the page for the desired item by using O and V keys and confirm the running status information for the desired item 5 Press the key to go back to the menu 3 19 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status 4 I O CHECK Menu 4 I O CHECK in Programming mode allows you to check the digital and analog input output signals coming in out of the inverter This menu is used to check the running status during maintenance or test run Table 3 10 lists check items available Table 3 10 I O Check Items Input signals at terminal FWD REV X1 X5 Shows the ON OFF state of the input signals at the terminal block of control circuit block of the control circuit Highlighted when short circuited normal when open Input signals coming via FWD REV X1 X5 Input information for function code S06 communication o link XF XR RST Highlighted when 1 normal when 0 Output signals signals Y1 Y3 Y5 30ABC Output signal information I O signals fo Input signal at terminal block of control circuit in hexadecimal hexadecimal foe Output signal in hexadecimal LNK Input signal via communication link hexadecimal Input voltage at terminal 12 Input current at terminal C1 Analog input signals Analog output signals line Pain rae Pe Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function sele
5. Remove the standard keypad mounted on the inverter see Figure 2 32 and using a Remote Operation Extension Cable or a LAN cable interconnect the Multi function Keypad and the Inverter insert one end of the cable into the RS 485 port with RJ 45 connector on the Multi function Keypad and the other end into that on the inverter See Figure 2 34 RJ 45 connector modular jack Remote Operation Extension Cable Enclosure CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S or LAN cable Multi function Keypad Ss To the standard RS 485 port Figure 2 34 Connecting Multi function Keypad to the Inverter with Remote Operation Extension Cable or an off the shelf LAN Cable RJ 45 connector HM Using the multi function keypad in hand Follow step of Installing the multi function keypad on the enclosure panel above E Retracting the keypad into the inverter Put the keypad in the original slot while engaging its bottom latches with the holes as shown below and push it onto the case of the inverter arrow while holding it downward against the terminal block cover arrow Terminal Block Cover Figure 2 35 Retracting the Multi function Keypad 2 37 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component which may affect other loads and power factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power source as
6. D Ke jo lt Symbol Potentiometer 2 Tkto5k Table 2 10 Continued Name Functions Since low level analog signals are handled these signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 66ft 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are considerable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 18 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shielding effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal a malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or an equivalent to the device outputting the analog signal and or connect a capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 21 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit Shielded Wire lt Control Circuit gt External Device S Capacitor lt Control Circuit gt Analog Output 0 022 gF 50V 12 11 Ferrite Core
7. FO3 Frequency Limiter Upper F15 Frequency Limiter Lower F16 ei ad Reference 0 100 frequency Cote e When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the running frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 and F15 gt F25 F03 gt F16 where F23 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally 5 39 F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 C44 Bias Bias Reference Point Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Frequency command 1 Gain Gain reference point Gain Gain reference point Gain Gain reference point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its reference point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 or C42 an
8. input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal mode operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback 3 Used as an additional auxiliary frequency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands J Q D 2 Cc lt Input impedance 22kQ The allowable input voltage is 15 VDC If the input voltage exceeds 10 VDC however the inverter will interpret it as 10 VDC Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection Ensure that the slide switch SW5 on the control PCB is turned to the PTC position refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate The figure shown at the right illustrates lt Control Circuit gt the internal circuit diagram where SW5 10 VDC switching the input of terminal V2 between V2 and PTC is turned to the Operation level PTC position For details on SW5 refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide Comparator switches and handling control circuit External terminal symbol plate In this case Resistor Alarm you must change data of the function 237 Q code H26 av Figure 2 19 Internal Circuit Diagram SW5 Selecting PTC 11 Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals 13 12 C1 V2 common and FMA These terminal are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 25 J Q
9. Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal or through the communications port the inverter was forced to decelerate to stop gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 With a Run command being inputted any of the following operations has been performed Turning the power ON Releasing the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 To reset the alarm turn the Run command OFF Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period H96 gt If this was not intended check the settings of E01 through E05 on terminals X1 through X5 6 16 21 amp 7 Tuning error Problem Possible Causes 1 5 A phase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter The motor was a special type such as a high speed motor Auto tuning failed What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter Check whether the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 H51 P
10. ae 10 2 260 9 69 246 Power supply T ype voltage 8 12 Unit inch mm WW 2x 0 99 10 Power Pa eae a supply Type voltage 02 ol oB FRNOO7F1S MEA 5 Ea Ea AED 1 06 1 34 FRNO10F1S 2U 8 66 7 72 2 50 1 83 1 83 10 2 9 37 141 7 16 4 67 3 80 27 34 Three 220 196 63 5 46 5 46 5 260 238 118 5 96 5 phas FRNOTSF1S 2U 136 7 21 aa 1 34 1 65 208 V F a 2U Fea ea ee FAE 34 42 ERN025F15 2U 2 84 228 HEL E0 00 eal 186 2 2 Et 35 Ea 12 FRNOSOFISoU 2u 200 El aime FRNO10F1S 4U _ 1 34 P 8 66 7 72 2 50 1 83 10 2 9 37 141 7 16 4 67 3 80 27 34 Three FrRNOZOF SU 220 196 63 5 46 5 260 238 118 5 96 5 anes FRNO20F 1 40 136 7 21 8 46 1 34 1 65 215 34 460 V F een AU ne 6 54 0 08 42 IFRNO30F1S 4U a 166 2 2 250 226 400 378 Peta 85 130 FRNO40F1S 4U 8 13 Unit inch mm aii ANOOOEOO tH BRRGRERREE DODOA AOODODOODEODOOR Ann gt mN iini giin Uee oF aN Power Dimensions inch mm a ba pH wt gt ot o o m N voltage ES Eg 21 7 209 10 0 RA FRNO4OF1S 2U 320 240 550 530 255 FA Three ERNOSOF1S 2U 242 234 4 53 0 18 mee ERNOSOF1S 2U 14 0 10 8 615 595 10 6 115 6 10 4 5 S a ERNO aI 2U
11. 22 to 27 VDC Maximum load current 50mA This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y3 Refer to Transistor output described later in this table for more CM Digital Two common terminals for digital input signal terminals common These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals 11 s and CMY 2 27 J Q w D Q Table 2 10 Continued Functions ra Ti O B Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 23 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE Note To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Control Circuit gt lt Control Circuit gt o PLC SINK SOURCE SOURCE ae FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler Q CM CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 23 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact E Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 24 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programma
12. Be sure to use the rubber bushes If not a sharp cutting edge of the cable guide plate hole may damage the cable sheath This may induce a short circuit fault or ground fault A fire or an accident may be caused E Mounting the cable guide plate Mount the cable guide plate following the steps illustrated in Figure 2 10 in reverse Tightening torque 15 9lb in 1 8 Nem 2 10 2 3 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes tightening torque and terminal arrangements Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types Two terminals designed for grounding shown as the symbol amp in Figures A to J make no distinction between a power supply source a primary circuit and a motor a secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main circuit terminals Table 2 6 Main Circuit Terminal Properties Power supply Nominal applied Terminal Tightening Grounding Tightening voltage motor HP HETEL PS screw size torque N m screw size torque N m BEIGE FRNO01F1S 2U Moca eae M4 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure A FRNOO3F1S 2U FRNOO5F1S 2U FRNOO7F1S 2U M5 3 8 M5 3 8 aa 38 38 puee Three FRNO15F1S 2U phase FRNO20F 1S 2U M6 5 8 M6 5 8 e 208 V FRNO25F1S 2U FRNO30F1S 2U Figure D M8 13 5 FRNO40F1S 2U Figure E FRNO50F1S 2U e ane 60 FRNO60F1S 2U ia m FRN075F1S 2U FRN100F1S 2U FRNOO01F1S 4U 1 8 M4 1 8 Figure A Figure G a a 2 FRN002F 18 4 s
13. FRNOOSF1S 4U_ 5 FRNOOSF1s 4U_ 7 FRN0O7F1s 4U_ o FRNOTOF1S 4U_ s FRNOTSF1S 4U_ Figure B 20 FRN020F 18 40 _FRNO25F1S 4U_ m 0 _FRNO30F1S 4U_ Co o a 13 5 27 M6 F FRNO40F1S 4U FRNOS5OF1S 4U h 60 FRNO60F1S 4U M8 aes FRNO75F1S 4U a FRNTOOF1S 4U F F M10 Figure D Figure E Figure F RN125F154U RN150F1S 4U 1 2 3 5 7 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 Figure G 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 700 800 FRN200F1S 4U Figure H 200 250 FRN250F1540 s00 FRNGOOF1S 4U Figure s50 FRN350F154U 400__ _FRN4OOF1S 4U mE a0 FRNASOF1S 4U 500 FRNSOOF1S 4U e00 FRN600F154U 700 FRN700F1S 4U e00 FRNGOOF1S 4U 900 FRN900F1S 4U Terminal RO TO Common to all types Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 10 6lb in 1 2 N m Terminal R1 T1 Screw size M3 5 Tightening torque 8lb in 0 9 N m for the models of 208 V series 50HP or above for 460 V series 6OHP or above Figure L Figure M 13 5 M8 M10 2 11 Charging Figure A Figure H Lamp AUG O SOME as LIR L2 S LAT QO Charging a er 22 baik HAA 2 7 RATO Db Charging io S18 2 tone Charging Lamp O AAA eles LIRILYSILIT vV Charing Paus BR ay H a 2S ojojo R1 T1 Ol O O U V Ww O L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P Q amp ej o b BIZ Charing Figure D Figu
14. If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge current is generated by open close of the power factor correcting capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test When using remote control limit the wiring length between the inverter and operator box to 67ft 20m or less and use twisted pair or shielded wire If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent high frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance in the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is shorter than 164ft 50m If this length must be exceeded lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the current value or recommended wire size When several inverters drive motors do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors xi Selecting inverter capacity Transpor tation and storage Select an inverter according to the applicable motor ratings listed in the Driving standard specifications table for the inverter general purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or deceleration
15. LU Ifyou find any not available here mark in the related page column of the function code tables refer to FRENIC Eco User s Manual for details 5 2 F codes Fundamental Functions Change Dat Refer __ lcopying setting running page FOO Data Protection Disable data protection 5 23 Function code data can be edited Enable data protection F01 Frequency Command 1 Enable N Q keys on keypad Enable voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC Enable current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Enable sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 Enable voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC Enable terminal command UP DOWN control F02 Run Command Enable Z l E keys on keypad 5 24 Motor rotational direction from digital terminals FWD REV Enable terminal command FWD or REV Enable 9 keys on keypad forward Enable v keys on keypad reverse FO3 Maximum Frequency _ 25 0 to 120 0 aye o 5 25 F04 Base Frequency 25 0 to 120 0 bad i ae 5 26 FOS Rated Voltage 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage at Base Frequency 80 to 240 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 208 V series 160 to 500 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 460 V series FO7 Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 5 28 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start F08 Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 c
16. Note 2 7 r gin mgin Page for selecting Monitored item See Table 3 6 ltem to be monitored Hz v O Operation guide F 4 A A FWD REV STOP REM LOC Figure 3 8 Selecting Items to be Monitored on LED Monitor Note 1 Displayed only if the inverter PID controls the motor according to a PID process command specified by the function code J01 1 or 2 While the 7 segment LED monitor is displaying PID process command PID feedback value or PID output value the dot decimal point at the lowest digit on it is lit or blinking respectively Note 2 Analog input monitoring becomes active only when enabled by any data of the function codes E61 E62 or E63 Select terminal function 3 12 3 4 Programming Mode Programming Mode provides you with the functions of setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with a menu driven system Table 3 7 lists menus available in the Programming Mode Table 3 7 Menus Available in Programming Mode oe Quick Setup Displays only basic function codes that are pre selected 4 Data Setting Allows you to view and change the setting of the function code 344 you select Note Allows you to view and change a function code and its setting 2 Data Checking data on the same screen Also allows you to check the function codes that have been c
17. i4 temperature minus 5 C and it goes OFF when it drops down to the overheat trip 7 temperature minus 8 C This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 50 HP or above for 208V series or 75 HP or above for 460V series has locked E Service life alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of electrolytic capacitors on the PCBs DC link bus capacitor and cooling fan has expired This signal comes ON also when the internal air circulation DC fan 50 HP or above for 208V series or 75 HP or above for 460V series has locked This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not For details refer to Section 7 3 Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm E Command loss detected REF OFF Function code data 33 This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is ina command loss state as specified by E65 due to a wire break or a weak connection This signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed For details of the command loss detection refer to the descriptions of function code E65 5 57 E Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35
18. xiii Table of Contents Preface gt kiddin tion lad on ladon les oe e on lad lo ae ag I8 i E Safety precautiOns eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees i E Precautions for use 22encaenunenenenenenenenenenks xX How this manual is organized cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee xiii Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection ccccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 0 1 2 1 3 FANS POMAUON ciciericcticaci atin cna caasdateeasatess cans tedeaess todas 1 4 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 4 1 Temporary storage seseeeeeteeeees 1 4 1 4 2 Long term Storage e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 4 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER ost ese bi SeeaSee et ceehter canteen bee 2 1 2 1 Operating Environment 2 1 2 2 Installing the Inverter 2 1 220 MO e due clad cede dl E e dls aue disrett heh 2 6 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover 2 6 2 3 2 Removing and mounting the cable guide plate for models of 1 to 25HP for 208V and 1 to SOHP for 460V cccti ccc ceeteves open dace cackdeck testes 2 10 2 3 3 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw SPSCIICALIONS re sucsgosdaciivcbsduceuxsrecodaroceretoxteees 2 11 2 3 4 Recommended wire sizes eeeeeeeeeeeee 2 14 2 3 5 Wiring precautions vescne aciezece ene tbeseceskeectcestces 2 15 2
19. 0 00 Disable 0 07 Y 0 01 to 30 00 Starting Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 oa 1 SepFrenny oroo eter The shaded function codes L are applicable to the quick setup Change Default Refer when to running setting page 0 0 28 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 4 F code continued Change Code Data setting range when running F26 Motor Sound 0 75 to 15 208 V 25 HP or below 460 V 30 HP or below 1 Carrier frequency 0 75 to 10 208 V 30 HP or above 460 V 40HP to 100 HP 0 75 to 6 125 HP or above F27 Tone 0 Level 0 Inactive gt Level 7 Level 2 Level 3 F29 Analog Output FMA Output in voltage 0 to 10 VDC Mode selection 1 Output in current 4 to 20 mA DC F30 Output adjustment F31 Analog Output FMA Select a function to be monitored from the followings Function p Output frequency Output current Output voltage gt Output torque gt Load factor Input power PID feedback value PV 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 13 Motor output 14 Test analog output 15 PID process command SV 16 PID process output MV 2 Pusa rae a 0 ot E
20. 2 For inverters with a capacity of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V to 125HP for 208V 200HP for 460V E Removing and mounting the covers To remove the front cover loosen the four fastening screws on it hold it with both hands and slide it upward Refer to Figure 2 8 Put the front cover back in reverse order of the Make sure to properly match the position of the screw holes on both of the front cover and inverter case Table 2 5 Screw count and tightening torque Power supply voltage Inverter type e a Three Three phase 208 V 208 V FRNO40F1S 2U FRNO4OF1S 2U to FRN100F1S 2U FRN100F1S 2U M4x8 Max8 4 pes pcs 15 p 508 8 FRNO50F1S 4U to FRN150F1S 4U M4x8 4 pcs 15 9 1 8 Three phase 460 V FRN200F1S 4U M4x8 4 pcs 31 0 3 5 Fastening Screws Figure 2 8 Removing the Front Cover FRNO40F1S 2U 2 8 3 For inverters with a capacity of 250HP to 300HP E Removing and mounting the covers To remove the lower front cover loosen the five fastening screws on it and hold it with both hands and then slide it upward CNote You can do wiring works just removing the lower front cover To remove the upper front cover loosen the five screws on it while supporting it with a hand Pull and remove it with both hands Refer to Figure 2 9 3 Put back the upper and lower front covers in reverse order of and Make sure to properly match the position of the screw holes on the upper and lower front c
21. 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting Check the cabling and wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In winter the load tends to increase Check that a mechanical brake is in effect gt Release the mechanical brake if any Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 and H51 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check whether the frequency command below the slip compensated frequency of the motor signal is gt Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor Check the wiring connection A DC reactor is equipped for 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above models FRENIC Eco inverter cannot run without a DC rector gt Connect the DC reactor correctly Repair or replace wires for the DC reactor 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes 1 The maximum frequency currently specified was too low 2 The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low 3 The reference frequency currently specified was too low 4 Afrequency command e g multistep frequency o
22. 7 ALM CAUSEF by using W and V keys moving ES 3 Press the key to get the Alarm list screen which displays information on the four most recent alarm conditions alarm code and the number of occurrences for each alarm condition 4 Select the alarm condition to be displayed by using Ww and V keys 5 Press the key to display the alarm code on the LED Monitor and the screen for the cause of the alarm can be more than 1 page on the LCD Monitor 6 Press N and Y keys to view the previous next page 7 Press the key to return to the alarm list Press the key again to return to the menu NA QS Figure 3 18 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 7 ALM CAUSE menu 3 29 QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AVOMENU SHIFY 4 170 CHECK 5 MAINTENANC 6 ALM INF P17 ALM CAUSE AVIMENU SHIF KP CONNECTOR WIRING INVERTER UNIT KEYPAD WIRING INVERTER UNIT KEYPAD ELEC NOISE ALM CAUSE Select desired menu by moving the pointer j with N V key Press key to finalize desired menu Cause amp No of occurrences of most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 2 most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 3 most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 4 most recent alarm Press key to return to Menu Select desired alarm by moving the cursor with A Z key Press key to finalize desired alarm cause page Alarm cause 1 page Press
23. C1 4 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC Enable the sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 See the two items listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum frequencies Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the voltage input to terminal V2 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals Assign UP command data 17 and DOWN command data 18 to the digital input terminals X1 to X5 Cote Certain source settings e g communications link and multistep frequency have priority over the one specified by F01 For details refer to the block diagram in the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator 5 23 F02 C Tip Tip e You can modify the reference frequency anywhere you choose using the gain and bias settings to these analog inputs voltages entered via terminals 12 and V2 the current entered via terminal C1 For details refer to function code F18 e You can enable the noise reduction filter that applies to the analog input voltages entered via terminals 12 and V2 the current entered via terminal C1 For details refer to function codes C33 C38 and C43 Terminal 12 C1 and V2 Analog input Filter time constant e Using the terminal command Hz2
24. Do not insert fingers or anything else into the inverter Securely ground earth the inverter Only type B of RCD is allowed _ See manual for details FO A WARNING RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Securely ground earth the equipment Warning Plate Warning Plate Warning Label a FRNO15F1S 2U b FRNO40F1S 2U Figure 1 3 Warning Plates and Label 3 Terminal block location o el Keypad Enclosure f aa 7 Openable Control Circuit 7 7 a 5 i Main Circuit j Terminal Block l Control Circuit Terminal Block a Mx Terminal Block Control Circuit Keypad Enclosure Terminal Block Openable Main Circuit Terminal Block c FRN350F1S 4U Figure 1 4 Terminal Blocks and Keypad Enclosure Location 1 3 1 3 Transportation e When carrying an inverter always support its bottom at the front and rear sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only You may drop the inverter or break it e When hoisting an inverter with hoisting holes hook or rope the 4 holes evenly 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage temperature 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt Relative humidity 5 to 95 2 changes in temperature that would res
25. OPR MNTR AVDMENU SHIFY key 8 DATA 9 LOAD 10 USER E11 COMM AVOMENU Press key to finalize desired menu List of communication related function codes Lists function codes with their names Select the function by moving the cursor with N and V keys To go back to the menu press eset key Press key to finalize desired menu amp name of function code x Data exists 0 Data Data can be changed by pressing N V key COMMAND Select desired menu by moving the pointer with N amp 0 0O0O 655 35 AV DATA ADJUS M W X Z Code HLPEIMONITOR 98 OOHz MONITOR DATA AV3DATA ADJUS Range Operation guide Reference only Cannot be changed Data Operation guide Figure 3 29 Menu Transition for Communication Debugging 3 42 3 5 Alarm Mode When a protective function is triggered resulting in an alarm the inverter automatically enters the alarm mode displaying the alarm code on the LED Monitor and the details of the alarm on the LCD Monitor as shown below If there is no overlapping alarm O Er2 O Most recent cause No of consecutive occurrences KEYPD COM ERR Cause of alarm PRGSPRG MENU Operation guide RESETSRESET Operation guide Vv Figure 3 30 Without Non overlapping Alarm If there is an overlapping alarm 1 Er 0 Most recent cause No of consecutive occurrences KEYPD COM ERR Cause of alarm amp is added if there is an PRGYSPRG MENU Operation gu
26. Press the eset key to return to the menu from the function code list Screen Function code Function code name Y meeeiDATA PRTC memsFREQ CMD 1 meraOPR METHOD FOSMAX Hz ove esas AVF ft Operation guide The function of each key is displayed by automatic scrolling of this line eIMAX Hz Function code name lt Function code that has been changed from factory default Data 25 0 120 0 Allowable range AVIDATA ADJUS Operation guide im aSIMAX Hz 58 OHz Data before change 58 i H z Data after change 25 0 120 0 AYVYSDATA ADJUS Figure 3 11 Screen for Changing Function Code Data C Tip E Additional note on function code being selected The function code being selected blinks indicating the movement of the cursor F03 blinks in this example QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AVOMENU SHIFY 0 QUICK SET El DATA SET 2 DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AV OMENU SHIFY FOODATAPRTC memerF REQ CMD 1 mersaOPR METHOD JOEIMAX Hz we wen AV OF MeIDATA PRTC memerF REQ CMD 1 mers4OPR METHOD FOSMAX Hz DATA SE AVF meeIMAX Hz 58 DHe 25 0 120 O AVSDATA ADJUS 58 OHz THz 25 O 120 O AVZIDATA ADJUS Press re key to enter Menu Select desired menu by shifting the pointer with N key Press key to finalize desired menu Press key to return to Menu Select desired function code by moving the cursor with W O key Press key to finalize desired function
27. Rated current Auto tuning No load cunrent F99 Motor Selection 0 01 to 1000 where the data of function code P99 is 0 3 or 4 0 01 to 1000 where the data of function code P99 is 1 0 00 to 2000 Disable gt Enable Tune R1 and while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped and no load current while running 0 00 to 50 00 Characteristics of motor 0 oe standard motors 8 series Characteristics of motor 1 HP rated motors Characteristics of motor 3 Fuji standard motors 6 series Other motors The shaded function codes L are applicable to the quick setup 5 13 Change Data setting range el nN v1 2 Refer to table below Refer to table below H codes High Performance Functions preg bn Data Default Data setting range copying setting aral HO3 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization 5 62 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor parameters HO4 Auto resetting 0 Disable Times 5 63 Times 1 to 10 nos Resetinevan 0510200 No caee aa HO6 Cooling Fan ON OFF T Disable Always in operation Control Enable ON OFF controllable H07 Acceleration Deceleration 0 Linear 1 S curve Weak 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear HOS Select Starting 0 Disable p amp Characteristics 3 Enable Follow Run command either forward or Auto search for id
28. Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Connection has been Check if the wire for the external alarm signal is correctly connected to the performed incorrectly terminal to which the Alarm from external equipment has been assigned Any of E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 is set to 9 gt Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly 3 Incorrect settings Check if the Alarm from external equipment has not been assigned to an unassigned terminal assigned E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the assignment normal negative logic of the external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 gt Ensure that the polarity matches 9 GHz Inside of the inverter overheat Problem The temperature inside the inverter exceeded the allowable limit Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The ambient temperature Measure the ambient temperature exceeded the allowable limit specified for the inverter gt Lower the ambient temperature by improving the ventilation 10 LHH Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Temperature of the motor rose abnormally Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor motor exceeded that of motor specifications gt Lower the temperature 2 Cooling system for the Check if the cooling s
29. Speed monitor item Motor speed in rimin 2 Load shaft speed in r min Display speed in E50 Coefficient for Speed 0 01 to 200 00 1 0 04 Indication E51 Display Coefficient for 0 000 Cancel reset 0 001 5 59 Input Watt hour Data 0 007 to 9999 Keypad 0 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and Y Y Menu display mode 7 1 Function code data check mode Menus 2 and 7 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 7 The shaded function codes 7 are applicable to the quick setup 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 9 E code continued Code Data setting range Analog Input for Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding Extension function function to terminals 12 C1 and V2 as listed below selection None ua t Auxiliary frequency command 1 Auxiliary frequency command 2 C1 3 PID process command 1 PID feedback value V2 2 20 0 Analog input monitor Saving Digital Reference 0 Auto saving at the time atin main power turned off Frequency 1 Saving by pressing rs key Command Loss Detection 0 Decelerate to stop Level 20 to 120 999 Disable Det
30. adjustments of torque boost F09 acceleration time F07 and deceleration time F08 Make sure to set relevant function codes properly 4 4 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Eco series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into eight groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions of Frequency C codes Motor Parameters P_ codes High Performance Functions H_ codes Application Functions J codes Link Function y codes and Option Function o codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code This manual does not contain the descriptions of Option Function o codes For Option Function o codes refer to the instruction manual for each option The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 5 3 and subsequent pages E Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is runnin Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Change when running Validating and saving function code data y Possibl
31. and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the path of each pair of power lines to inverters Use the devices recommended ones within the related current range Use wires in the specified size Tighten terminals with specified torque Otherwise fire could occur Do not connect a surge suppressor to the inverter s output circuit Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident 2 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Table 2 9 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminal
32. being ON by default Searching for idling motor speed When a run command is turned ON with the STM being ON the inverter starts the auto search operation at the auto search frequency specified by H17 to run the idling motor without stopping it If there is a large difference between the motor speed and the auto search frequency the current limiting control may be triggered The inverter automatically reduces its output frequency to harmonize the idling motor speed Upon completion of the harmonization the inverter releases the current limiting control and accelerates the motor up to the reference frequency according to the preset acceleration time 5 66 STM ON Run Command ON Frequency Drop caused by Current Limit Frequency for idling i motor speed H17 Motor Speed Reference Frequency Searching for idling motor speed to follow C Note The frequency drop caused by the current limiting control during auto search for idling motor speed is determined by the frequency fall rate specified by H14 To use the auto search be sure to enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 E Select starting characteristic STM Digital input signal The STM terminal command specifies whether or not to perform auto search operation for idling motor speed at the start of running Select starting Data for H09 Auto search for characteristics Function idling motor speed terminal command Start at the starting
33. eset key to return to alarm list screen Press N V key to check all alarm causes Alarm cause 2 page Figure 3 18 Menu Transition for ALM CAUSE 3 30 3 4 9 Data copying 8 DATA COPY Menu 8 Data Copying in Programming Mode allows you to read function code data out of an inverter for which function codes are already set up and then to write such function code data altogether into another inverter or to verify the function code data held in the keypad with the one in the inverter The keypad can hold three sets of function code data in three areas of its internal memory so that it can be used with three different inverters You can read the function code data of an inverter into one of these memory areas or write the function code data held in one of these memory areas into the inverter you select On the LCD screen each set of function code data or memory area is given a name such as DATA 1 and DATA 2 Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 8 DATA COPY by using and V keys moving 3 Press the key to get the data copy index screen list of data copy operations 4 Select the operation read write verify check by using Q and Q keys moving ES 5 Press the key to finalize the choice of operation and then select the data set
34. 11 SW88 AX FAN TRY U DO OH LIFE REF OFF RUN2 OLP ID PID ALM PID CTL PID STP U TL RMT AX2 THM C10FF M1 M1_L M2_1 M2_L M3_ M3_L M4_L MCHG MLIM ALM 5 8 Change slain Data Default running opying setting COLEEN E code continued Incre Change Data Defaut Peer Code Data setting range niii when convin saii to l running pying 9 page E31 Frequency Detection 0 0 to 120 0 5 58 FOT Detection level E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 120 0 0 career E34 Overload Early Warning Disable 0 01 v1 Current value of 1 to 150 of the inverter rated current Y2 Current Detection Level mmeo ion fs __ 1000 Eao PD Damar Coena o0w00000 forj v v Ea Pio spay cooncen s s0000 fof v r om E43 LED Monitor Speed monitor Select by E48 Item selection Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Input power 10 PID process command Final 12 PID feedback value 14 PID output 15 Load factor 16 Motor output 17 Analog input a lt E45 LCD Monitor Running status rotational direction and operation ltem selection guide Bar charts for output frequency current and calculated torque E46 Language selection 0 Japanese English German gt French Bacay Italian E47 Contrast control e N E EA E48 LED Monitor Output frequency
35. 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test and begin test driving of the motor ACAUTION If any abnormality is found to the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING Vr 1 Turn the power ON and check that the LED monitor blinks while indicating the iii Hz frequency 2 Set the frequency to a low frequency such as 5 Hz using A V keys Check that frequency command blinks on the LED monitor 3 Press the 0 key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the frequency command is displayed on the LED monitor correctly 4 To stop the motor press the E108 key lt Check the following points gt e Check if the direction of rotation is forward e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the Fun key again to start driving the motor and increase the frequency command using N V keys Check the above points for the test driving of the motor 4 2 Operation After confirming ordinary operation by performing a test run make mechanical connections connections of the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and set the necessary parameters properly before starting a production run t Depending on the conditions of the production run further adjustments can be required such as
36. 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover 1 For inverters with a capacity of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below E Removing the covers To remove the terminal block TB cover first loosen the TB cover fastening screw on it and put your finger in the dimple of the terminal block TB cover labeled PULL and then pull it up toward you To remove the front cover hold it with both hands slide it downward to unlatch Tilt the front cover toward you and pull it upward Terminal Block TB TB Cover Cover Fastening Screw _ Figure 2 6 Removing the Covers FRN015F1S 2U 2 6 E Mounting the covers Put the front cover to the inverter case while fitting the edge of the front cover between the both hinges provided on the inverter case Slide it upward until the front cover latches Fit the latches on the terminal block TB cover in the holes provided to the front cover and push it towards the inverter case Tighten the TB cover fastening screw on the terminal block TB cover Tightening torque 15 9lb in 1 8 N m Front Cover Front Cover Hinge Viewed from B Latch TB Cover TB Cover Fastening Screw Terminal Block TB Cover Figure 2 7 Mounting the Covers FRNO15F1S 2U 2 7
37. 485 link Option RS 4686 link Option RS 485 link Option H42 Capacitance of DC Link Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to Bus Capacitor FFFF Hexadecimal Initial Capacitance of DC Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor 0000 to Link Bus Capacitor FFFF Hexadecimal Cumulative Run Time of Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit board Capacitors on the Printed 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal Resettable Circuit Board Select Starting 0 0 to 10 0 Characteristics Auto search time for idling motor speed H50 Non linear Vif Pattern 0 0 Cancel Frequency 0 1 to 120 0 H51 Voltage Oto 240 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 208 W Oto 500 Output a voltage AVR controlled for 460 V H56 Dacatoration Time for 0 00 to 3600 Forced Stop H63 Low Limiter 0 Limit by F16 Frequency Limiter Low and continue Mode selection to run 1 If the output frequency lowers less than the one limited by F16 Frequency Limiter Low decelerates to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting frequency 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency Limiter Low H9 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 5 70 3 Enable Control DC link bus voltage at a constant Overload Prevention 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 Hz s Y Y 999 0 01 to 100 00 999 Disable H71 Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y Characteristics i Enable Control 5 15 H code continued Cod
38. 60 60 25 35 25 35 70 25x2 95 50x2 95x2 120x2 N on 25x2 95 120 70x2 240 120x2 150x2 185x2 240x2 240x2 240x3 240x4 Aux fan power supply R1 T1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD GFCI with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 158 F 600V PVC wires used at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F vii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada UL cUL listed inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the UL standards and CSA standards CUL listed for Canada by installation within precautions listed below ACAUTION Solid state motor overload protection motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay is provided in each model Adjust function codes F10 to F12 to decide the protection level Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 rms three phase symmetrical amperes 240 Volts maximum for 208V class input 30HP or less 230 Volts maximum for 208V class input 40HP or above or 480 Volts maximum for 460V class input Use 60 C 75 C Cu wire only Use Class 1 wire only Field wiring connections must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved Connector must
39. Cc 9 Voltage unbalance 8 2 E 100 to 900HP Item Specifications Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480V With AVR function posacem a ras 108 wo 20 02 0 ars Jarr ero Jeo rea ow woo rrean O Overload capability 120 of rated current for 1min Rated frequency 50 60Hz Three phase 380 to 440V 50Hz Three phase 380 to 480V 60Hz Output ratings Main power supply AWA CoNo Single phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz power input E Single phase 380 to 440V 50Hz 5 Single phase 380 to 480V 60Hz Required power supply capacity kVA 7 11 d Torque 8 DC injection braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0s Braking level 0 to 60 34 42 45 63 96 96 98 162 162 240 240 355 360 360 1 Standard 4 pole motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 460V for three phase 460V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or tripping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1kHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating 5 Use R1 1T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the
40. Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary gt If only auxiliary control power is supplied turn ON the main power Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source slide switch on the printed circuit board is properly configured Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction FO2 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed FO2 2 or 3 Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command While referring to the block diagram of the drive command generator check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings in H30 y98 etc or cancel the higher priority run command Check that a
41. Data Setting Menu 3 14 Basic key operation This section will give a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 11 This example shows you how to change function code F03 data maximum frequency from 58 0 Hz to 58 1 Hz 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Using Q and Q keys move the pointer to 1 DATA SET and then press the key which will display a list of function codes 3 Use Q and V keys to select the desired function code group in this example F03 and press the key which will display the screen for changing the desired function code data Gre 4 Change the function code data by using Q and Q keys Pressing the key causes the blinking digit place to shift cursor shifting The blinking digit can be changed 5 Press the key to finalize the function code data The data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code in this example F04 If you press the eset key before the eS key the change made to data of the function code is cancelled The data reverts to the previous value the screen returns to the function code list and the function code F03 reappears 6
42. F5 208 V series 50 HP or above 460 V series 75 HP or above P1 P N Inverter Unit DC linked power input configuration L PWM converter linked configuration Figure 2 13 Switching Fan Power Source 2 19 E Setting up the jumpers for the connectors CN UX CN R and CN W These switching connectors are located on the power printed circuit board power PCB mounted at the right hand side of the control printed circuit board control PCB as shown below Switching Connectors for Power Input CN UX Switching Connectors for Fans CN R CN W Auxiliary Power Input Terminals for Control Circuit Figure 2 14 Location of Switching Connectors and Auxiliary Power Input Terminals Note TC remove the jumper pinch its upper side between your fingers unlock its fastener and pull it up To insert it pull it down as firmly as it locks with the connector until you will have heard a click sound CN UX CN R CN W Figure 2 15 Inserting Removing the Jumpers 2 20 Figure 2 16 shown below illustrates how the configuration jumpers of the connectors CN UX CN R and CN W are setup by factory defaults and to change their settings for a new power configuration E Setting up the power switching connector CN UX for the models of 460 V 75HP or above Connector configuration Allowable power input voltage range should be within 15 to 10 of power source voltage E Setting up the fan power s
43. Frequency Command fq ag neo s fl x EGS Internal Frequency 100 Command ELEGET In the diagram above f1 is the level of the analog frequency command sampled at any given time The sampling is repeated at regular intervals to continually monitor the wiring connection of the analog frequency command Cnote Avoid abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command Otherwise a broken wire condition may be recognized When E65 is set at 999 Disabled though the command loss detection signal REF OFF is issued the reference frequency remains unchanged the inverter runs at the analog frequency command as specified When E65 is set at 0 or 999 the reference frequency level that the broken wire has been recognized as fixed is f1 x 0 2 When E65 is set at 100 or higher the reference frequency level of the broken wire fixing is f1 x 1 The command loss detection is not affected by the setting of Analog input adjustment filter time constants C33 C38 and C43 5 60 E80 E81 C33 C38 C43 P01 P02 Detect Low Torque Detection level Detect Low Torque Timer The signal U TL turns on when the torque calculated by the inverter with reference to its output current has dropped below the level specified by E80 for the time longer than the one specified by E81 The signal turns off when the calculated torque exceeds the level specified by E80 5 The minimum width of output signal is 100 ms You
44. Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency commands 1 and 2 For details refer to function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 e You can modify the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 F01 by using the selection C53 and switching IVS of normal inverse operation For details refer to the description of Switch Normal Inverse Operation IVS in function codes E01 to E05 Run Command F02 selects the source issuing a run command for running the motor Keypad Enables the Fw ev E keys to start and stop the motor The direction of rotation is determined by the commands given at terminals FWD and REV External signal Enables the external signals given at terminals FWD and REV to run the motor Keypad Enables wo 8 keys to run and stop the motor Forward rotation Enables only forward rotation You cannot run the motor in the reverse direction There is no need to specify the direction of rotation Keypad Enables fev Gros keys to run and stop the motor Reverse rotation Enables only reverse rotation You cannot run the motor in the forward direction There is no need to specify the direction of rotation ON When function code F02 O or 1 the run forward FWD and run reverse REV A Note commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively In addition to the run command F02 described there are several other sources available wit
45. Input Voltage 66 ft 20 m 328 ft 100 m 1312 ft 400 m 208 VAC Input Voltage 1312 ft 400 m 1312 ft 400 m 1312 ft 400 m Drives 5 HP and smaller Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V 460 VAC Input Voltage 66 ft 20 m 165 ft 50 m 165 ft 50 m 208 VAC Input Voltage 328 ft 100 m 328 ft 100 m 328 ft 100 m For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking CNote When a motor protective thermal O L relay is inserted between the drive and the motor the thermal SS O L relay may malfunction particularly in the 460V series even when the cable length is 165 feet 50m or less To correct insert a filter or reduce the carrier frequency Use function code F26 Motor sound DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 2 Connect a DC reactor option to terminals P1 and P n Note The wiring length should be 33ft 10 m or below Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P e Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor is not going to be used e An inverter with a capacity of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above is equipped with a DC reactor as standard Be sure to connect the DC reactor except when an optional converter is connected to the inverter 6 Switching connectors m Power switching connectors CN UX for the models of 460 V 75HP or above An inverter of 460 V 75HP or above is equipped with a set of switching connectors CU U
46. P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter operates or while it is turned ON Check if the expected performance satisfying the standard specification is obtained Check if the surrounding environment satisfies Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection by following the items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor turn OFF the inverter and shut down power supply Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the ambient temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The standard humidity vibration and atmosphere measure using specification must be dust gas oil mi
47. P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning per P04 e When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use automatic torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power consumption of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system The inverter enables this feature only upon constant speed operation During acceleration and deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or automatic torque boost depending on data of the function code F37 If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for a system that requires quick acceleration and deceleration Cnote e Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher you may get little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the a
48. RS 485 communications card malfunctioned What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter Replace the card 25 amp H LSI error Power PCB 50HP or above 208 V 75HP or above 460 V Problem An error occurred in the LSI on the power printed circuit board power PCB Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The capacity is not set The inverter capacity needs to be modified again 2 properly on the control printed circuit board The contents of the memory on the power supply printed circuit board are corrupted Connection problem between the control printed circuit board and the power supply printed circuit board gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative The power supply printed circuit board needs to be replaced gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative Either the control printed circuit board or the power supply printed circuit board needs to be replaced gt Contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed
49. Residual current operated protectice devide Ground fault AC reactor circuit interrupter Radio noise filter Magnetic Power supply Noise filter contactor 4 a insulation transformer Power supply for inverter control Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 17 Connection Example of residual current operated protective device RCD Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter GFCl 2 22 When connecting a PWM converter with an inverter do not connect the power supply line directly to terminals RO and TO If a PWM is to be connected insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor at the power supply side For connection examples at the PWM converter side refer to the PWM Converter Instruction Manual Note Molded case circuit breaker or Residual current operated protectice device Magnetic Filter Boost Ground fault circuit interrupter reactor reactor PWM FRN G1S converter R P S contactor P N insulation transformer 100 VA Magnetic contactor Auxiliary B contacts Figure 2 18 Connection Example of PWM Converter Q Auxiliary power input terminals R1 and T1 for the fan Inverters 208 V 50HP or above and 460 V 75HP or above are equipped with these terminals R1 and T1 Only if the inverter works with the DC link power input whose source is a power regenerative PWM converter e g RHC series these terminals a
50. Restart time also applies to the switching operation between line and inverter refer to E01 through E05 terminals X1 through X5 Note 5 38 F15 F16 E Restart after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the motor rotation cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the motor rotation according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action on the frequency fall rate Follow the deceleration time specified by F08 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI controller in current limiter The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter Fa If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the Note motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control Frequency Limiter High Frequency Limiter Low F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively Output frequency Maximum Frequency
51. Terminal Block Cover Control Circuit Terminal Symbol Plate Cable Guide Plat Multi function Front di Keypad Cover Hel n S al Main Nameplate a Nameplate Main Circuit Control Circuit Screw Terminal Block Cover Terminal Block Terminal Block a FRNO15F1S 2U Cooling Fans Control Circuit Terminal Block Warning Multi function Label Keypad N Warning Plate Charging Lamp Front Cover Main Nameplate AA Main Circuit Front Cover S Terminal Block b FRNO40F1S 2U Upper i internal Air Circulation Front a Cooling Fans DC Fan Ge Cover ti Control Circuit Terminal Block Upper Fron _ Warning Multi function i Cover y Fe Eo rez Label Keypad Warning Plate a Charging Lamp gt Lower Front Cover Main Circuit Terminal Block Main Nameplate Lower Front Cover c FRN350F1S 4U Figure 1 2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters 2 Warning plates and label FRENIC ECO A WARNING a RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation Do not remove any cover while ing power and at least 5min after ng power A WARNING a RISK OF INJURY OR ELECTRIC SHOCK Refer to the instruction manual before installation and operation a RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK Do not remove this cover while applying power This cover can be removed after at least 10min of power off and after the CHARGE lamp tums off
52. The hole in the cable tie support is 0 15 inch 3 8 mm x 0 06 inch 1 5 mm in size To pass the cable tie through the hole it should be 0 15 inch 3 8 mm or less in width and 0 06 inch 1 5 mm or less in thickness Cable tie Cable tie support Control circuit cable Control circuit terminal board Figure 2 28 Routing and Fastening the Control Circuit Cable CNote Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit Such as the terminal block of the main circuit 2 33 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate Before changing the switches or touching the control circuit terminal symbol plate turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the po
53. and 30A B C will not be turned ON CNote If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C 77 50 F 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor CNote If does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor 7 3 1 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition In general the discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation is different from that under which the initial measurement is conducted at the time of factory shipment As a result the measured data for the DC link bus capacitor may not be updated A method is provided therefore that allows you to measure th
54. code Press N V key to change function code data Press key to finalize function code data Press key to cancel change of data Figure 3 12 Changing Function Code Data 3 4 2 Setting up function codes quickly using Quick setup 0 QUICK SET Menu 0 QUICK SET in Programming Mode allows you to quickly set up a fundamental set of function codes that you specify beforehand Whereas at shipment from factory only a predetermined set of function codes is registered you can add or delete some function codes using 10 USER SET The set of function codes covered by Quick Setup is held in the inverter not the keypad Therefore if you mount your keypad onto another inverter the set of function codes held in the new inverter is subject to Quick Setup If necessary you may copy the set of function codes subject to Quick Setup using the copy function 8 DATA COPY If you perform data initialization function code H03 the set of function codes subject to Quick Setup will be reset to the factory default For the list of function codes subject to Quick Setup by factory default refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES LCD screen transition from the 0 QUICK SET menu is the same as with 1 DATA SET Basic key operation Same as the basic key operation for 1 DATA SET 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes 2 DATA CHECK Menu 2 DATA CHECK in Programming Mode allows you to check f
55. effective When the terminal is OFF the settings of those function codes are ineffective and both frequency commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control 5 70 H69 H70 H91 Automatic Deceleration H69 specifies whether automatic deceleration control is to be enabled or disabled During deceleration of the motor if regenerative energy exceeds the level that can be handled by the inverter overvoltage trip may happen With automatic deceleration enabled when the DC link bus voltage exceeds the level internally fixed for starting automatic deceleration the output frequency is controlled to prevent the DC link bus voltage from rising further thus regenerative energy is suppressed Cote If automatic deceleration is enabled deceleration may take a longer time This is designed to limit the torque during deceleration and is therefore of no use where there is a braking load Disable the automatic deceleration when a braking unit is connected The automatic deceleration control may be activated at the same time when a braking unit starts operation which may make the acceleration time fluctuate In case the set deceleration time is so short the DC link bus voltage of the inverter rises quickly and consequently the automatic deceleration may not follow the voltage rise In such a case prolong the deceleration time Even if the time period of 3 times of the deceleration time 1 F08 has elapsed after
56. enclosure well Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative running time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information MAINTENANC gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before the overload protection occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload protection control H70 6 11 CNote The 208V inverters with a capacity of 50HP or above and the 460V inverters with a capacity of 75HP or above each have a cooling fan fans for heat sinks and a DC fan for internal air circulation dispersing the heat generated inside the inverter For their locations refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 8 4 Alarm issued by an external device Problem External alarm was inputted THR in case external alarm THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals X1 through X5 FWD or REV Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 An alarm function of the Inspect external equipment operation external equipment was activated gt
57. enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 6 ALM INF by using Q and V keys moving E 3 Press the key to get the Alarm list screen which displays information on the four most recent alarm conditions alarm code and the number of occurrences for each alarm condition 4 Select the alarm condition to be displayed by using Q and V keys 5 Press the key to display the alarm code on the LED Monitor and the screen for the status data at the time of the alarm 1 page out of a total of 7 pages on the LCD Monitor 6 Select the page for the desired item by using Q and V keys and confirm the status data for the desired item 7 Press the amp key to return to the alarm list Press the eset key again to return to the menu Figure 3 17 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 6 ALM INF menu QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AVDMENU SHIFY Select desired menu by moving the pointer j with N V key OPR MNTR 17 0 CHECK MAINTENANC ALM INF AV MENU SHIFTY Press 3 key to finalize desired menu Cause amp No of occurrences of most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 2 most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 3 most recent alarm Cause amp No of occurrences of 4 most recent alarm Press key to return to Menu Select desired alarm by moving th
58. frequency Start at the auto search frequency specified by H17 Start at the starting frequency E Frequency for idling motor speed H17 H17 specifies the auto search frequency for idling motor speed Be sure to set a value higher than the idling motor speed Otherwise an overvoltage trip may occur If the current motor speed is unknown specify 999 that uses the maximum frequency at the start of auto search operation E Auto search for idling motor speed H09 HO9 specifies the starting rotational direction forward reverse of the auto search and the starting pattern patterns 1 to 4 If the motor is idling in the reverse direction that is against the specified direction because of natural convection it is necessary to start it in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the original reference frequency When the rotational direction of the idling motor is unknown two starting patterns are provided as listed below which start search from the forward rotation and if not succeeded from the reverse rotation e g HO9 5 pattern 3 start search from the reverse rotation e g H09 5 pattern 4 Rotational direction Data for H09 dha saa oi aoiseach Starting pattern 3 4 5 5 67 Starting patterns The inverter makes its frequency shift in accordance with the starting patterns shown below to search the speed and rotation direction of the idling motor When harmonization is complete between the motor speed in
59. from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter Mounting FRENIC Eco series of inverters can be installed to your system enclosure or equipment using adapters mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for conventional inverters of FRENIC5000P11S 7 5HP 20HP or 40HP series FRENIC5000P11S 10HP 15HP 25HP and 30HP models do not need this adapter Other peripheral equipment Attachment for This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC Eco series of inverters on the panel in sucha external cooling way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the outside Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your enclosure Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below On inverters with a capacity of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above you only need to re position the mounting bases Other options 9 4 Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 1 Conformity with UL Standards and Canadian Standards cUL listed for Canada 10 1 1 General The UL standards originally established by Underwriters Laboratories Inc of U S are now a set of standards authorized in the U S for preventing fire and accidents thereby protecting operators service p
60. handling on DC fan lock detection in a style of combination Automatic lowering function of carrier frequency You have to prevent important machinery from stopping as much as possible Even if the inverter is in heat sink overheating or overload state because of excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or a trouble in the cooling system with this function enabled the inverter lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping L77 Lix or LiL L Note that if this feature is enabled the motor noise increases Protection against input phase loss _ 7_ Upon detecting an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit because of phase loss or inter phase imbalance in the 3 phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 17 Cote In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected a phase a loss or an inter phase imbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit TUN Protection against output phase loss 1 Output Phase Loss Upon detecting a phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7_ Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work
61. in operation FAN Function code data 25 Under the cooling fan ON OFF control enabled H06 1 this output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control E Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON when auto resetting is in progress The auto resetting is specified by H04 and H05 Auto resetting Refer to function codes H04 and HO5 for details about the number of resetting times and reset interval E Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this output signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the RS 485 communications link or the field bus allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the RS 485 communications link or field bus refer to the respective instruction manual E Heat sink overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take a corrective action before an overheat trip 74 actually happens This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the the overheat trip
62. inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 and F08 gt Enable current limitig F43 gt Raise the inverter capacity Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual gt Enable the auto resetting H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise 2 amp F Ground fault 125 HP or above Problem 1 3 Problem Possible Causes The output terminal of the inverter is short circuited to the ground ground fault or earthed iin Overvoltage ust A ground fault current flew from the output terminal of the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Disconnect the wires from the output terminals U V and W and perform a megger test gt Remove the earthed path including the replacement of the wires the terminals or the motor as necessary The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage Lii Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration TU 1 Lii Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration TU 1 Lii Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 2 The power supply voltage was over the range of the inverter s
63. keypad operation LOC 38 1038 Enable to run RE 39 Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial pawer 50 Hz ISW50 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISVV60 50 1050 Clear periodic switching time MCLR 51 1051 Enable pump drive motor 1 MEN1 52 1052 Enable pump drive motor 2 MEN2 53 1053 Enable pump drive motor 3 MENS 54 1054 Enable pump drive motor 4 MEN4 87 1087 Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 BE Run forward 2 PWD2 Bo Run reverse 2 REV2 Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively 5 7 E code continued Code E20 Signal Assignment to Transistor signal Y1 E21 Y2 E22 Y3 E24 Relay contact signal E27 Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y 1 to Y3 YSA C and 30A B C as listed below Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown below assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 0 1000 Inverter running 1 1001 Frequency arrival signal 2 1002 Frequency detected 3 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Inverter output limiting Auto restarting after momentary power failure Motor overload early warning Inverter ready to run Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For MC
64. link Via RS 485 communications link standard standard 2 4 Via RS 485 communications link inverter itself F02 option card 5 Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link option card 7 Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link standard option card Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Command sources specified by y98 O o emee O oe ooo Combination of command source Frequency command Via RS 485 Via RS 485 ome ae Via field bus Inverter itself communications communications link standard link option card option Inverter itself H30 0 H30 1 H30 4 H30 0 1 or 4 y98 0 y98 0 y98 0 y98 1 Via RS 485 H30 2 3 or 5 communications y98 1 link standard Via RS 485 H30 6 7 or 8 communications y98 1 link option card Via field bus H30 0 2 or 6 H30 1 3 or 7 H30 4 50r 8 H30 0 1 to 8 option y98 2 y98 2 y98 2 y98 3 For details refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS 485 communication User s Manual or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual ne fa 5 e 5 X e When the LE terminal command is assigned to a digital input terminal and the terminal is ON the settings of function code H30 and y98 are
65. mode on the keypad and check the voltage of the DC link bus which should be 200 VDC or below for 3 phase 208V and 400 VDC or below for 3 phase 460V gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications 2 The main power is not ON Check that the main power is turned ON while the auxiliary input E power to the control circuit gt If it is not ON turn it ON is supplied f 3 appears Problem Parentheses _ has appeared on the screen while the keypad displaying the Drive Monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The data to be displayed Check that the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient could not fit the LED E50 does not exceed 9999 monitor e g overflown gt Adjust the setting of E50 6 20 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time Take care of the following items during work A WARNING e Before proceeding to the maintenance inspection jobs turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals
66. of F15 J19 Lower limit of PID 1 to 120 process output 999 Depends on setting of F16 J21 Dew Condensation Prevention Duty J22 Commercial Power 0 Keep inverter operation Stop due to alarm Y Switching Sequence 1 Automatically switch to commercial power operation 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 lt J17 lt J code continued Code J25 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31 J32 J33 J34 J35 J36 J37 J36 J39 440 J41 J42 Name Data setting range Disable Enable Fixed inverter driven Enable Floating inverter driven Motor 1 Mode Disable Always OFF Enable Force to run by commercial power Motor 3 Mode Motor Switching Order Fixed Automatically Constant run time Motor Stop Mode Stop all motors inverter and commercial power driven Stop inverter driven motor only excl alarm state Stop inverter driven motor only incl alarm state Periodic Switching Time 0 0 Disable switching for Motor Drive 0 1 to 720 0 Switching time range 999 Fix to 3 minutes Periodic Switching 0 01 Y Y 0 10 Signaling Period 0 00 to 600 00 Mount o
67. on commercial line Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For primary side SW52 2 Switch motor drive source between commercial power and inverter output For secondary side SW52 1 15 1015 Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side 25 1025 Cooling fan in operation 26 1026 Auto resetting 27 1027 Universal DO 28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning 30 1030 Service life alarm 33 1033 Command loss detected 35 1035 Inverter output on 36 1036 Overload prevention control 37 1037 Current detected 42 1042 PID alarm 43 1043 Under PID control 44 1044 Motor stopping due to slow flowrate under PID control 45 1045 Low output torque detected 54 1054 Inverter in remote operation 55 1055 Run command activated 56 1056 Motor overheat detected PTC 59 1059 Terminal C1 off signal 60 1060 Mount motor 1 inverter driven 61 1061 Mount motor 1 commercial power driven 62 1062 Mount motor 2 inverter driven 63 1063 Mount motor 2 commercial power driven 64 1064 Mount motor 3 inverter driven 65 1065 Mount motor 3 commercial power driven 67 1067 Mount motor 4 commercial power driven 68 1068 Periodic switching early warning 69 1069 Pump control limit signal 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm RUN FAR FOT LU 5 1005 OL 6 1006 IPF OL RDY 7 1007 10 1010
68. once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 6 6 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the 3 inverter main circuit power auxiliary power for control circuit The power for the control circuit did not reach a high enough level The keypad was not properly connected to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Connect a molded case circuit breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary Check if the short bar has been removed between terminals P1 and P or if there is poor contact between the short bar and the terminals gt Connect the short bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P or retighten the screws Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter gt Remove the keypad put it back and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists When running the inverter remotely ensure that the extension cable is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter gt Disconnect the cable
69. or storage area on the keypad 6 Press the key to finalize the selection and perform the operation of your choice for details refer to the LCD screen transition diagram below 7 Press the key to return to the menu A Figure 3 19 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 8 DATA COPY menu 1 Selecting Copy Operation QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK OPR MNTR AV gt MENU SHIFYW Select desired menu by moving the pointer j with Q v key MAINTENANC ALM INF ALM CAUSE Hs DATA COPY AV OMENU SHIF Press key to finalize desired menu KP INV READ List of data copy operations i KPSINV WRITE Select desired operation by moving the cursor with N IY KP INV VERIFY key KPDATA CHECK AV To return to Menu press key Figure 3 19 Menu Transition for DATA COPY Table 3 14 List of DATA COPY Operations Read Read data Reads out function code data from the inverter and stores it into the internal memory of the aaa Write Write data Write data Writes the data held in the selected memory area of the Writes the data held in the selected memory area of the keypad into the inverter into the inverter Verify Verify data Verifies the data held in the keypad s internal memory against the function code data in the inverter Check Check data Checks the model information format and function code data held in the three memory areas of the keypad 3 31 2 Read Operati
70. other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged 7 5 Pit NC L1 R U ea eel Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters 7 5 Insulation Test Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment avoid a Megger test If a Megger test is unavoidable follow the procedure below Because a wrong test procedure will cause breakage of the inverter take sufficient care A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test procedure is wrong When the dielectric strength test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit _ Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement 2 Ifthe test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the control wiring 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground terminal 5 5MQ 1 MQ for the EMC filter built in type of inverters or a larger value displayed at the Megger indicates a correct state The value is for a discrete inverter Inverter Li R L2 S L3 T P1 U V W RO TO P N Figure 7 2 Megger Test 2 Di
71. overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm i_ and shuts down its output This signal comes ON when the current exceeds the level specified by E34 Overload early warning Cote Function code E34 is effective for not only the OL signal but also for the Current detected signal ID E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing hardware preparation such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of the control circuit and no protective functions are activated E Select AX terminal function AX Function code data 15 In response to a run command FWD this output signal controls the magnetic contactor on the commercial power supply side It comes ON when the inverter receives a run command and it goes OFF after the motor decelerates to stop because of a stop command received This signal immediately goes OFF upon receipt of a coast to stop command or when an alarm occurs L1 R to L3 T UV WE Power Source Motor Y5A AX FRENIC ECO 52 1 MC in primary circuit Run Command FWD AX 52 1 Z Preparation for running E g Charging of Capacitor Inverter Status Motor Speed 5 56 HM Cooling fan
72. performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 12 lists the maintenance information display items Table 3 12 Display Items for Maintenance Shows the cumulative run time during which the inverter was powered ON When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again er Shows the current capacitance of the DC bus capacitor as of the CAP Capacitance of the DC bus capacitor capacitance at factory shipment Refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details Shows the cumulative run time of the motor MTIM Cumulative motor run time When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the product of the cumulative time of voltage being applied to the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board and a coefficient TCAP Cumulative run time of electrolytic t Cumulative run time mer determined by the environmental condition When the total time capacitor on the printed circuit board sxceeds 65 535 hours the counting will stop As a guide 61 000 hours is considered as life Shows the cumulative run time of the cooling fan When the total time Cumulative run time of the cooling exceeds 65 535 hours the counting will stop As a guide 61 000 hours is considered as life This number varies with the capacity of the inverter Shows the total count of start ups o
73. reconnect it and see whether the problem persists gt Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the problem persists 2 The desired menu is not displayed Causes 1 The limiting menus 3 function was not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad menu display mode gt Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu can be displayed Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running The data of the function codes is protected The WE KP command Enable editing of function code data from keypad is not input though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal The key was not pressed The setting data of function code F02 could not be changed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes Check the data of function code FOO Data protection Change the setting of FOO from 1 to 0 Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keyp
74. signal E20 to E22 E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 Y2 and Y3 are transistor outputs and terminals Y5A C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems Cote e When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power source Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 3 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals Y5A C and 80A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where a frequent ON OFF switching is
75. so on The inverter controls each member of pump control sequences issuing the power source switching signal between the inverter output and commercial power Two control modes are avai One is a fixed motor driving mode where the inverter exclusively controls the single pump Another is a cyclic motor driving mode where the inverter cyclically controls a member of pumps Fixed motor driving mode Pumps under control one inverter driven four commercial power driven Cyclic motor driving mode Pumps under control three inverter commercial power driven in this mode a relay output card option OPC F1S RY is required Furthermore this control features a constantly periodic switching function an average time drive switching function a cumulative pump run time monitor a cumulative relay activating times monitor and so on Running stopping Speed monitor output current A output voltage V torque calculation value input power kVV PID reference value PID feedback value PID output load factor motor output Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Output frequency Hz motor speed r min load shaft speed r min indication Lifetime early warning Shows the lifetime early warnings of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards external _ ball issued in a the DC link bus capacitor and the cooling fan or relay output signal Cumulative run time Shows the cumula
76. sound carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 0 If grating sound can be heard from motor Possible Causes 1 2 The carrier frequency was set too low The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Resonance with the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Readjust the setting of F27 to appropriate value Measure the temperature inside the enclosure of the inverter gt If it is over 40 C 104 F lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load In the case of a fan or a pump lower the setting data of the frequency limiter F15 Note If you disable H98 an 4 4 i A s or LiL Li alarm may occur Check the precision of the mounting of the load or check whether there is resonance with the enclosure or likes Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter and determine where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency band so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency rang
77. specify in conjunction with output terminal signals OL and ID the level and duration of overload and current beyond which an early warning will be issued E Overload Early Warning The warning signal OL is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition alarm code 4 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The signal turns on when the current level specified by E34 Overload early warning is exceeded In typical cases set E34 to 80 90 against data of F11 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Select motor characteristics and F12 Electronic thermal overload protection for motor Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL Motor overload early warning data 7 to any of the digital output terminals E Current Detection The signal ID turns on when the output current of the inverter has exceeded the level specified by E34 Current detection Level and the output current continues longer than the period specified by E35 Current detection Timer The signal turns off when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ID Current detection data 37 to any of digital output term
78. terminals are not used 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque Varies with the efficiency of the motor Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V METIIECETB00 3 0 2 3 If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR 12 D a a c Z a 9 Voltage unbalance 8 3 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 8 2 1 General specifications of keypad Protective structure Table 8 1 General Specifications Specification Front side IP40 Back mounting side IP20 Remarks Site to be installed In door Ambient temperature 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F Ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed Ambient air No corrosive gas no inflammable gas no dust and no direct sunlight allowed Altitude 1000m or less Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa Vibration Storage ambient temperature 3 mm maximum amplitude Within 2 to 9 Hz 9 8 m s Within 9 to 20 Hz 2 m s Within 20 to 55 Hz 1 m s Within 55 to 200 Hz 25 to 70 C 13 to 158 F Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation allowed External dimension Refer to Section 8 5 3 Keypad Weight 0 12 Ibs 55g Note When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 3300ft 1000 m to 9800ft 3000 m you need to lower the out
79. the input value and inverse in PID process control and manual frequency command To select the inverse operation turn the IVS command ON Output frequency Inverse 00 pit i se Fa i a co Normal ov 10V Analog input voltage 4 m 20 mA Analog input current Tio The normal inverse switching operation is useful for air conditioners that require aP switching between cooling and heating In cooling the speed of the fan motor output frequency of the inverter is increased to lower the temperature In heating it is reduced to lower the temperature This switching is realized by the Switch normal inverse operation command For details of PID control refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 9 PID Frequency Command Generator and Chapter 9 Section 9 2 6 J codes 5 49 e When the inverter is driven by an external analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 The Switch normal inverse operation command IVS can apply only to the analog frequency command sources terminals 12 C1 and V2 in frequency command 1 F01 and does not affect frequency command 2 C30 or UP DOWN control As listed below the combination of the Selection of normal inverse operation for frequency command 1 C53 and Switch normal inverse operation IVS determines the final operation Combination of C53 and IVS Data for C53 IVS Final operation 0 Normal operation Ee eae eee 1 In
80. the inverter If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter It may also be necessary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor correcting capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Install the inverter onto the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the cont
81. to be controlled using the function code E40 and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B Display value PID process command feedback value x Coefficient A B B PID output value PID output value displayed in with Maximum frequency F03 being 100 Figure 3 14 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the OPR MNTR menu PID feedback value 3 18 QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AV gt MENU SHIFY Select desired menu by moving the pointer with N key O QUICK SET 1 DATA SET 2 DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AVIMENU SHIFY Press key to finalize desired menu Output frequency Reserved Output current Output voltage 99 Calculated torque Fref 60 OOHz Frequency command FWD IL LU Running direction status Common operation eea To confirm data call the desired page using N key SYN 1800r m Motor shaft speed Press eset key to return LOD 60 00Or m Load shaft speed to Menu LIN m m Reserved PID process command PID feedback value PID output value Figure 3 14 Menu Transition for OPR MNTR Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the rd key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 3 OPR MNTR by using Q and Q keys moving ES 3 Press the key to display the screen for Operation Monitor 1 page out of a total of 4 pages
82. to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar E Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power source 9 2 fd Name of option Function and application DC reactors A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied power factor DCRs reformation for reducing harmonic components 1 For power supply normalization Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more than the rated inverter capacity In this case the percentage reactance of the power source decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor which can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned ON OFF 2 For supplied power factor reformation harmonic component reduction Generally a capacitor is used to reform the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrea
83. torque boost F09 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals Check whether control terminal V2 is not set to the PTC thermistor input mode gt Turn the V2 PTC switch on the printed circuit board to V2 Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure the motor does not restart Possible Causes 1 The data of function code F14 is either O or 1 2 The run command stayed off even after power has been restored What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if an undervoltage trip occurs gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure mode selection to 3 4 or 5 Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command on While in 3 wire operation the power source to the inverter s control circuit went down because of a long momentary power failure or the HOLD signal was turned OFF
84. you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate any noise emitted from these products 10 3 Conformity with Low Voltage Directive 10 3 1 General General purpose inverters are subject to the regulations set forth by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric declares the inverters bearing a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 10 3 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product in conformity with Low Voltage Directive If you wish to use the FRENIC Eco series of inverters as a product in conformity with the Low Voltage Directive refer to the related guidelines described on pages vi and vii 10 1 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 4 1 General When a general purpose industrial inverter is to be used in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below When an inverter whose rated input is 1kW or below is connected to a public low voltage power supply it is subject to the harmonics emission regulations users A and B below except when the inverter is connected to an industrial low voltage power supply user C below See Figure 10 1 for details Medium Voltage Medium to low voltage transformer power supply Medium to low voltage transformer Public low voltage e Industrial low voltage Inverter Inverter power supply 1 kW or 1 kW or below below User A a
85. 0 C Tin e Even if multistep frequency is selected as the PID process command SS4 ON you still can A 1P set the process command using the keypad e When function code J02 is set to any value other than 0 pressing the O V key displays on the 7 segment LED monitor the PID command currently selected while you cannot change the setting r min m min kW X10 min sec PID Means that PID Process Command 1 is effective lt REMOTE REF gt P I D P 1 A A A A A a FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND e On the 7 segment LED monitor the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to characterize what is displayed The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID process command is displayed the decimal point lights when a PID feedback value is displayed el 4 Decimal point E Setting up the frequency command with and O keys under PID control When function code F01 is set at 0 Keypad operation and frequency command 1 Frequency setting via communications link Disabled Multistep frequency setting Disabled PID control Disabled is selected as the manual speed command you can modify the frequency setting using the N V key if you specify the LED monitor as the speed monitor while the keypad is in Running Mode You cannot modify the frequency setting using the N V key while the keypad is in Programming Mode or Alarm Mode To enable the modification of the frequency setting u
86. 00 4 00 1 79 3 15 2081 05 0 20 0 JFRNOOSF1S 4U 460 6 30 5 0 6 30 5 00 6 30 239 3 34 2357 0 5 0 20 0 JFRNOO7F1S 4U 460 9 30 5 0 9 30 7 50 9 30 3 12 265 2891 05 0 20 0 5 0 FRNO10F1S 4U 10 00 12 70 4 37 243 30 78 0 5 0 20 0 FRNO15F1S 4U 15 00 29 13 1 0 0 20 0 1 0 0 30 00 25 00 30 00 31 49 1 0 0 20 0 30 00 36 20 32 55 1 0 0 20 0 5 0 1 0 134 00 134 00 125 00 169 00 169 00 150 00 169 00 45 20 0 96 21 61 1 5 0 10 2 JFRN200F1S 4U 460 231 00 10 00 231 00 200 00 231 00 81 80 0 72 20 84 2 0 010 2 NIN N FRN250F1S 4U 460 272 00 10 00 272 00 250 00 272 00 41 10 0 71 18 72 25 010 2 FRN300F1S 4U 460 323 00 10 00 323 00 300 00 323 00 45 10 0 53 18 44 2 5 010 2 JFRN350F1S 4U 460 375 00 10 00 375 00 350 00 375 00 68 30 0 99 19 24 25 010 2 FRN400F1S 4U 460 429 00 10 00 429 00 400 00 429 00 80 70 1 11 18 92 4 0 010 2 NINININ 481 00 85 50 0 95 19 01 4 0 010 2 534 00 99 20 1 05 18 39 5 0 0 10 2 638 00 140 00 0 85 18 38 5 0 010 2 638 00 140 00 0 85 18 38 5 0 010 2 638 00 140 00 0 85 18 38 5 0 0 10 2 FRN900F1S 4U 638 00 140 00 0 85 18 38 5 0 010 2 NININININ 5 22 5 2 Overview of Function Co
87. 02 and P0O3 agrees with the specifications of the motor Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the motor is not exceeding 50m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the connection wire length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque set F37 to 1 Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or more orders of class gt Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set F37 to 1 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost set F37 to 1 For details of tuning errors refer to Errors during Tuning in Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 22 amp amp RS 485 communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment Even though no response error detection time y08 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect setting
88. 1 center bar appears Problem A center bar has appeared on the LCD monitor Possible Causes 1 When PID control had been disabled J01 0 you changed E43 display selection to 10 or 12 You disabled PID control J01 0 when the LED monitor had been set to display the PID final command value or PID feedback value by pressing the Gs key Connection to the keypad was in poor connection What to Check and Suggested Measures Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items E43 is not set to 10 PID process command final or 12 PID feedback value gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 Make sure that when you wish to view a PID process command or a PID feedback value PID control is still in effect or J01 is not set to 0 gt Set J01 to 1 operation Enable normal operation or 2 Enable inverse Prior to proceed check that pressing the S key does not take effect for the LED display Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the cable 2 ___ _ under bar appears Problem An under bar ______ appeared on the LED monitor when you pressed the FuN key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV The motor did not start Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The voltage of the DC link Select 5_ under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming bus was low
89. 26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor Disable Tone level 0 Enable Tone level 2 Enable Tone level 3 Enable Tone level 1 Cote If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or tas mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor Analog Output FMA Mode selection Output adjustment Function These function codes allow you to output to terminal FMA monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in the form of an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable E Mode selection F29 F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal FMA You need to set switch SW4 on the control PCB accordingly referring to the table below Positioning slide switch SW4 Data for F29 Suputifonm mounted on the control PCB C Sn e l Cote The current output is not isolated from the analog input and does not have its own independent power source Therefore this output must not be connected in cascade to outside instrument and gauges if some difference in potential is there between the inverter and peripheral equipment regarding connection of analog input etc Avoid needlessly long wiring 5 43 E Output adjustment F30 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current represen
90. 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals ccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 2 15 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 24 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate 2 34 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 35 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 5 0 5 cnc cre dezcusctadetcascesedesee 2 35 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps eee 2 36 2 5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component Noise and Leakage Current eener 2 38 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE MULTI FUNCTION KEYPAD ocete erare eeta eE eE Ea EE EEn 3 1 3 1 Key LED and LCD Monitors on the Keypad 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes c eeeeeeee 3 4 3 3 Running Mode n se 3 5 3 3 1 Running stopping the motor eee 3 5 3 3 2 Setting up the frequency and PID process COMMANOS s tcc eter eae E 3 8 3 3 3 LED monitor Monitoring the running status 3 12 3 4 Programming Mode s 3 13 3 4 1 Setting function codes 1 Data Setting 3 14 3 4 2 Setting up function codes quickly using Quick setup 0 QUICK SET c cece 3 17 3 4 3 Checking changed function codes 2 DATA CHEGK tcc cccct teres Sete deste 3 17 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status 3 OPR MNTR cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 18 3 4 5 Checking I O signal status As UO CHECK scecccesesesices cence etene eee Ee 3 20 3
91. 355 275 29 1 28 3 270 155 FRN100F1S 2U 740 720 26 8 228 ae 15 6 10 0 a 0 24 3x 0 59 0 59 peer ee 680 580 rise 255 Pora 3x615 15 320 240 255 140 re 7 650 630 ea 4 53 LO 948 2x 60 39 0 39 z TE AT n 115 6 10 4 5 2x 10 10 FRN100F1S 4U 14 0 10 8 270 155 615 595 355 275 FRN125F1S 4U 29 1 28 3 118 571 610 FRN150F1S 4U 740 720 300 145 155 FRN200F1S 4U 29 1 28 0 e 4 i oo as 7 2x60 39 0 39 Three 20 9 16 9 740 710 2x10 10 phase FRN250F1S 4U 530 430 ae 2 09 i A FRN350F1S 4U 1000 970 26 8 22 8 1000 970 380 200 3x 0 59 680 7 09 0 24 180 6 FRN500F1S 4U 580 3x 15 SS Sa 55 1 53 9 17 3 10 2 34 6 30 7 1400 1370 440 260 FRN800F1S 4U 880 780 FRN900F1S 4U 2x60 39 0 39 2x 10 10 0 59 15 4x 60 59 4x 15 8 14 8 5 2 DC reactor 2 x Terminal through hol Power Dimension inch mm supply voltage Inverter type Reactor D2 through through l bs kg w1 D D1 D3 H hole for ieou penae 827 2 39 7 28 3 98 0 08 3 19 4 92 1 99 0 04 4 92 ae u 16 210 10 185 101 2 81 125 50 5 1 125 7 4 RNOSOF18 2u penae 8 27 2 39 7 28 4 17 0 08 3 39 5 31 2 09 0 04 4 92 1 aa 19 Three 210 10 185 106 2
92. 4 F04 Variable torque characteristics F37 0 Constant torque characteristics F37 1 d Tip When the variable torque load characteristics is selected in function code F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some motor itself and load characteristics In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Output Voltage V Variable Torque Output using Non linear Wi Pattern Rated Voltage dee eee ce cece e ees at Base Frequency F05 Constant Torgue Output not using Non linear V f Pattern Non linear Vit Pattern Voltage H51 Output Frequency 0 Non linear Wf Pattern Base Hz Frequency Frequency H50 FO4 E Torque boost e Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient start torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Select an appropriate level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant rega
93. 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 MAINTENANC n se 3 23 3 4 7 Reading alarm information 6 ALM INF 3 26 3 4 8 Viewing cause of alarm TPM CAUSES M eoio eiere iere e 3 29 3 4 9 Data copying 8 DATA COPY 3 31 3 4 10 Measuring load factor 9 LOAD FCTR 3 38 3 4 11 Changing function codes covered by Quick setup 10 USERS EPan led ieee ne 3 41 3 4 12 Performing communication debugging 11 COMM DEBUG ees 3 42 3 5 Alarm MOC Sica esere eere e aee eeaeee epea iE 3 43 3 6 Other PleCaullOns sermacsssncsracecheren eticreteatmateuacs 3 45 3 6 1 Function code setting for F02 Run and Operation tan tit iccs e aeons eran eens 3 45 3 6 2 Remote local operation cceeeeeee 3 45 3 6 3 Tuning motor parameters ceeeeeeee 3 46 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR cceeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 4 1 Running the Motor for a TeSt ccecceeeeeeteereeees 4 1 XIV 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to DOWNING ON saisescatecd geatancnccmereuecceeehceeteeehecess 4 1 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data 4 1 4 1 4 TESUTUM iwnictetseleisstencedodtanelhdolalepteenacecenes 4 4 4 2 OPCTAUOM eect sntestarecined cecatetiaonnt adsnardeasaudattleonndaidewes 4 4 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables cccc
94. 800F1S 4U FRN900F1S 4U 100 600 900 1 2 3 5 T 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 1 2 3 5 T 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 50 125 175 200 250 300 400 450 500 700 1000 1200 1600 Select the MCCB or RCD GFCI with appropriate breaking capacity according to the power supply capacity 9 1 Cc 0 2 oO 6b cb cC Q oO Q Name of peripheral equipment Molded case circuit breaker Ground fault circuit interrupter with overcurrent protection Magnetic contactor MC Function and application A WARNIN When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker and ground fault circuit interrupter in the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range With overcurrent protection Fire could occur An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output secondary sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines E At the power source primary side Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source generally commercial factory power lines with the protection function built into the inverter or with the
95. 86 135 53 1 125 8 4 Wee 10 0 0 39 8 86 3 78 0 08 2 99 5 51 1 89 0 04 5 71 22 208 V TU i A TU z J TU FRNOGOF1S 2U DCR2 55C M6 M12 persse tasi 10 22 96 2 Ale een eas Me w2 10 2 FRNO75F1S 2U gt 2 5 ec 10 0 0 39 8 86 4 17 0 08 3 39 5 71 2 09 0 04 5 71 we l y 26 255 10 225 106 2 86 1 145 5341 145 11 4 pnosoris 4u pcR4as7c 82 0 39 7 28 3 98 0 08 3 19 4 13 1 99 0 04 4 92 g ae 210 10 185 101 2 81 105 50 5 1 125 7 4 pNosoris 4u pcR4aasc 227 039 7 28 4 17 0 08 3 39 4 72 2 09 0 04 4 92 g a 210 10 185 106 2 86 120 5341 125 8 4 W FRN100F1S 2U 106 FRNO75F18 4U DCR4 55C 10 0 0 39 8 86 3 78 0 08 2 99 4 72 11 89 0 04 5 71 M6 M10 23 255 10 225 96 2 76 120 48 1 145 10 3 FRN100F1S 4U DCR4 75C 10 0 0 39 8 86 4 17 0 08 3 39 4 92 2 09 0 04 5 71 M6 M10 27 255 10 225 106 2 86 125 53 1 145 12 4 Three 10 0 0 39 8 86 14 57 0 08 3 78 5 51 12 28 0 04 5 71 32 phase FRN125F1S 4U DCR4 90C M6 M12 460 V 255 10 225 1162 96 140 58 1 145 14 7 ER T en atne 11 8 0 39 10 4 4 57 0 08 3 54 6 89 2 28 0 04 6 10 sis eae 41 300 10 265 116 2 90 175 58 1 155 18 4 Seer ree 11 8 0 39 10 4 4 96 0 16 3 94 7 09 2 48 0 08 6 30 Nig ii 4
96. 9 300 10 265 126 4 100 180 63 2 160 22 0 FRN250F1S 4U 13 8 0 39 12 2 5 55 0 16 4 45 7 28 2 78 0 08 7 48 65 DCR4 200C M10 M12 FRNGOOF 18 4U Pore onc 350 10 810 141 4 113 185 ose ooo 1 M2 29 5 Se A ET 13 8 0 39 12 2 5 75 0 16 4 65 7 87 2 87 0 08 7 48 one ae 72 350 10 310 146 4 118 200 73 2 190 32 5 Note 1 For inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above types FRNO75F1S 2U FRN100F1S 4U or above a DC reactor is attached as standard oa AIA A 8 15 8 5 3 Multi function Keypad Unit inch mm fe MS 4 12 104 6 5 06 128 5 Dimensions of panel cutting viewed from A 8 6 Protective Functions LED Name Description monitor displays Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from an During protection overcurrent resulting from overload acceleration Short circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from protection overcurrent due to a short circuiting in the output circuit During deceleration Ground fault protection Stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This protection is effective only during startup of the inverter If you turn ON the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Applicable to inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or be
97. 91 Pollution degree 2 IEC60664 1 Note 2 The atmosphere can contain a small amount of salt 8200ft 2500m to 9800ft 3000m 0 88 0 01 mg cm or less per year 4900ft 1500m to 6600ft 2000m 0 95 The inverter must not be subjected to sudden Note 1 When inverters are mounted changes in temperature that will cause side by side without any gap between them condensation to form 5HP for 208V 7 5HP for 460HP or below the ambient temperature should be within Altitude 3300ft 1000m max Note 3 the range from 10 to 40 C 14 to 104 F Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa environment where it may be exposed to pressure cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the Vibration For inverters of 100 HP or below inverter is to be used in such an 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz environment install it in the enclosure of 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz your system or other dustproof containers 2 m s 20 to less than 55 Hz Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 3300ft 1000m you should 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 For inverters of 125 HP or above 3 m s Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 2 m s 9 to less than 55 Hz 1 m s 55 to less than 200 Hz Top 3 9inch 100 mm 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to a
98. B C Y2A B C and Y3A B C 100 Depends on the setting of E20 to E22 60 1060 Mount motor 1 inverter driven M1_ 1 61 1061 Mount motor 1 commercial power driven 62 1062 Mount motor 2 inverter driven 63 1063 Mount motor 2 commercial power driven 64 1064 Mount motor 3 inverter driven 65 1065 Mount motor 3 commercial power driven 67 1067 Mount motor 4 commercial power driven 68 1068 Periodic switching early warning 69 1069 Pump control limit signal M1_L M2_1 M2_L M3 M3_L M4_L MCHG MLIM Indication of cumulative run time of motor for replacement Change when running Data copying Default setting J53 J54 J55 Maximum Cumulative Number of Relay ON Times Y 1A B C ta Y3A B C Y1 2 C3 Y5A 30A B C Indication of the maximum number of ON times of relay contacts on the relay output card or those built in inverter Display of 1 000 means 1000 times For relay output card For built in mechanical contacts 5 19 y codes Link Functions Change Dat Refer wee slo nin 5 stg o A copying setting running page Immediately trip and alarm E 8 Trip and alarm 8 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If retry fails trip and alarm amp amp If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run Error processing timer 0 0 to 60 0 Minne Transmiss
99. CMY and CM in this case wy J Q J O O Par 2 12 Cc i e Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM s and 11 s common E Tio E Connecting Programmable Controller PLC to Terminal Y1 Y2 or Y3 Crip Figure 2 26 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a sink for the control circuit output whereas in example b it serves as a source for the output lt Contral Circuit Programmable lt Control Circuit Bee A Logic Controller Logic Controlle Photocoupler Current SINK Input SOURCE Input 24 VDC a PLC serving as Sink b PLC serving as Source Figure 2 26 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit 2 30 Classifi cation Relay contact output Communication Table 2 10 Continued Mi Y5A C 30A B C RJ 45 connector for the keypad General purpose relay output Alarm relay output for any error Standard RJ 45 connector A general purpose relay contact output usable as well as the function of the transistor output terminal Y1 Y2 or Y3 Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3 A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5 A 2 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two conta
100. DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous Continue to run for running level upon a momentary power failure continuous heavy inertia se running control Is invoked Continuous running control general loads regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and prolongs the running time When an undervoltage condition is detected due to a lack of energy to be regenerated the output frequency at that time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state When power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is ideal for fan applications with a large moment of inertia Enable restart As soon as the voltage of the DC link bus drops below the undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output frequency at the time is saved the output of the inverter is shut down and the motor enters a coast to stop state Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads When power is restored if a run command has been input restart begins at the reference frequency saved during the power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary p
101. Disabled during acceleration and deceleration Enable during acceleration and al constant speed 20 to 120 The data is interpreted as the rated output current of the inverter for 100 5 6 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Refer Change Code Name Data setting range mer Unit when n Possun to ment copying setting f running page E01 Command Assignment to Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding 5 45 x1 function to terminals X1 to X5 as listed below E reee ree e e Ee EL E E _ E05 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD y 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX amp 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 11 1011 Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 13 Enable DC brake DCBRK 15 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SVW50 16 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz 85W80 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UF 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable write from keypad Data changeable WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch nonmaliinverse operation VS 22 1022 Interlock IL 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE 25 1025 Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Select starting characteristics STM 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local
102. E Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 Run forward 2 and Run reverse 2 FWD2 and REV2 Function code data 87 88 or 89 These terminal commands switch the run command source They are useful to switch the source between the digital input and the local keypad when the Enable communications link command LE and Select local keypad operation command LOC are turned OFF Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator for details Run command source Communications link disabled Normal operation FR2 FR1 Communications link enabled OFF Follow the data of F02 Follow the data of S06 FWD REV FWD2 or REV2 Follow the data of S06 FWD2 REV2 Turning the FWD2 command ON runs the motor forward and turning the REV2 command reverse Turning either of them OFF decelerates the motor to stop 5 51 E20 to E22 E24 E27 E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 Signal Assignment to Y1 to Y3 Transistor signal Signal Assignment to Y5A C and 30A B C Relay contact
103. E34 In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload protection control H70 Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Increase the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information MAINTENANC gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL 6 14 15 amp Memory error Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter Possible Causes 1 While the inverter was writing data especially initializing data or copying data power supply was turned OFF and the voltage for the control circuit dropped 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter while data especially initializing data was being written 3 The control circuit failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if pressing the eS key resets the alarm after the function code data are initialized by setting the data of HO3 to 1 gt Return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding a
104. Enable voltage input to terminal V2 to 10 VDC Enable terminal command UP DOWN control C32 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 1 Rl el ill Bal Rel 5 40 for 12 Gain C33 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 o 00t0500 tititi sd ON yy C34 Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 1 TS 5 40 C37 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 1 Hal all Bil Hd I for C1 Gain A es mT Lo C39 Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 1 foooto 100 007 Joaj f v y 100 age a Fol al sl I for V2 Gain C43 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 foootos 00 Joajfjs y y oo Cas Gain reference point 0 00 to 100 00 1 wmn 540 C50 Bias Reference Point 0 00 to 100 0 1 om jej wv oo Frequency command 1 C51 Bias for PID command 1 100 0 to 100 00 1 onje e v oo Bias value C52 Bias reference point 0 00 to 100 00 1 Foor f v v 000 C53 Selection of Normal 0 Normal operation T Y Inverse Operation 1 Inverse operation Frequency command 1 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 12 P codes Motor Parameters No of poles Rated capacity
105. FO Instruction Manual Designed for Fan and Pump Applications FRENIC ECO Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Eco series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For how to use an optional device refer to the installation and instruction manuals for that optional device Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Fuji Electric Corp of America INR SI47 1225 E Copyright 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Eco series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor for fan and pump applications Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handli
106. Fass the same phase wires through or turn them around the ferrite core 2 or 3 times Figure 2 20 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 21 Example of Electric Noise Reduction 2 26 Table 2 10 Continued Symbol Name Functions X1 Digital 1 The various signals such as coast to stop alarm from external equipment and input 1 multistep frequency commands can be assigned to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function Codes inputa 2 Input mode i e Sink Source is changeable by using the internal slide switch 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between X1 to X5 FWD input 3 or REV and CM If the logic value for ON between X1 and CM is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa input 4 4 The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for FWD and REV X5 Digital input 5 Digital input circuit specifications lt Control Circuit gt ON level 2V PLC OFF level 27 V ON evel Operation ON level 27 V voltage SOURCE OFF level 2V Operation current at ON Input voltage is at OV 5 mA Allowable leakage i current at OFF p osm Q CM J Q is D Q Figure 2 22 Digital Input Circuit Connects to PLC output signal power supply Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range
107. Motor output Motor output kW Twice the rated motor output Calibration a output Full scale output of the 10 VDC or 20 mA DC meter calibration Output level of the PID PID process controller under PID output MV control Frequency command Maximum frequency F03 5 44 F34 F35 E01 to E05 E98 E99 Terminal FMI Output Adjustment Function For FMI The inverter outputs monitoring data including output frequency and output current via terminal FMI in analog current level E Output adjustment F34 Setting this function code adjusts the output current level of the selected monitor item within O to 200 as well as the function code F30 E Function F35 Setting this function code selects a monitor item to be output to terminal FMI as well as the function code F31 Command Assignment to X1 to X5 Command Assignment to FWD and REV Function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X5 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON ACAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run comma
108. N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually and individually For details of how to set up or edit function codes refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE Note MULTI FUNCTION KEYPAD 5 1 E Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An ON active signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to OFF active signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An ON active signal can be switched to OFF active signal and vice verse with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O signal terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code and then press the Gs key The table below shows that the coast to stop command BX is assigned to the terminal X1 using the function code E01 If BX is ON the inverter coast to stops the motor If BX is OFF the inverter coast to stops the motor The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Eco series of inverters
109. NO75F1S 2U FS5536 400 99 FRN100F1S 2U FRNO25F 1S 4U EFL 22G11 4 FRNO30F1S 4U FRNO40F1S 4U FS5536 100 35 FRNOSOF 1S 4U FRNO60F 1S 4U FRNO75F1S 4U FS5536 180 40 FRN100F1S 4U FRN125F1S 4U FRN150F1S 4U FS5536 250 28 FRN200F1S 4U FRN250F1S 4U FRN300F1S 4U FS5536 400 99 1 FRN350F1S 4U FRN400F1S 4 seal Se FN3359 600 99 FRN450F1S 4U FRN500F1S 4U FRN600F1S 4U FN3359 800 99 FRN700F1S 4U FRN800F1S 4U PERNGOORIS AU Migo FRN9O00F1S 4U 1 The values are calculated assuming the power supply frequency of 50 Hz for both 3 phase 240V and 3 phase 400V 2 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line 3 Requires a panel mount adapter option Split style See Figure 10 2 B FRNOO1F1S 4U FRNO02F1S 4U EFL 4 0G11 4 FRNOO3F1S 4U FRNOO5F1S 4U FRNOO7F1S 4U 3 Footmount style FRNO10F1S 4U EFL 7 5G11 4 See Figure 10 2 A FRNO15F1S 4U FRNO20F1S 4U 3 EFL 15G11 4 3 phase 460 V 10 4 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter This section shows how to install an EMC compliant filter In the footmount style mount the inverter on the EMC compliant filter In the split style mount the filter beside or under the inverter For the footmount style inverters with ratings of 460 V 7 5HP and 20HP require a panel mount adapter option as listed below Table 10 2 EMC compliant Filter and Panel mount Adapter option EMC filter model Panel mount adapter model 3 phase 460 V Inverter type Bundled sc
110. Option communi cations error detection Option error detection Operation error detection LED monitor displays Description Upon detection of a fuse blown in the inverter s main circuit this function stops the inverter output Applicable to 125HP or above for both 3 phase 208 V and 3 phase 460 V Upon detection of an abnormal condition in the charger circuit inside the inverter this function stops the inverter output Applicable to 50HP or above 3 phase 208 V or 75HP or above 3 phase 460 V In the following cases the inverter stops running the motor to protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal overload protection setting Protects general purpose motors over the entire frequency range F10 1 Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range F10 2 The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by F11 and F12 APTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor protection Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals V2 and 11 and set the function codes and slide switch on the control PCB accordingly Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the motor is stopped by the electronic thermal overload protection for the motor Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active Instantaneous overcurrent limiting Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of
111. Pin Assignment Figure 2 27 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for the keypad so do not use those pins for any other equipment 2 31 Classifi cation Cc xo oO c J E O O Table 2 10 Continued u Internal switch Terminal 1 Terminal 2 xe Eon 485 communications oxe fon terminal RS 485 communications data terminal Communications cable shield terminal DX relay terminal for multidrop DX relay terminal for multidrop SD relay terminal for multidrop Terminating resistor switching This extends the functions of inverter to the below in addition to the RJ 45 connector to communicate on FRENIC Eco The inverter can be controlled as a subordinate device slave by connecting it to an upper level device host master such as a PLC or personal computer Note The connection between this card and Keypad Inverter support loader does not function Refer to RS 485 communication Users Manual about the details Terminating resistor RS 485 communications card 2 32 Wiring for control circuit terminals E For models of FRN200F1S 4U to FRN350F1S 4U Route the control circuit cable in keeping with the left side panel of the inverter as shown in Figure 2 28 Fasten the control circuit cable to the cable tie support with a cable tie insulation lock as shown in Figure 2 28
112. RO TO 3 5 FRN015F1S 2U_ 55 2 i 60 Power supply Control circuit FRNO20F1S 2U eee ae Eseo EE 60 100 g a 5 5 Sars pu fe fe Pt bed 60 KAEA A oO 00 Three phase 208 V 100 200 ii 325 era N N gt Three phase 460 V ERNo25F1S40 35 55 a EN 60 100 a 325 250x2 00x2 DC reactor 1 Use crimp style terminals that are insulated or insulate using tubing or other methods acceptable by local and national codes The insulation thermal rating of the wiring must be 60 or 75 C 140 or 167 F with the inverter ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F O1 Oi O D 2 14 2 3 5 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the three phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned on 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring Secondary circuit of the main circuit
113. S 2U 125 FRN125F1S 2U 1 FRN001F1S 4U 2 FRN002F1S 4U 3 FRNOO3F1S 4U 5 FRNOOSF1S 4U 7 FRNOO7F1S 4U 10 FRNO10F1S 4U 15 FRNO15F1S 4U 20 FRNO20F1S 4U 25 FRNO25F1S 4U 30 FRNO30F1S 4U 40 50 60 Three phase 2 2 FRNOSOF1S 4U FRNO60F1S 4U FRNO75F1S 4U FRN100F1S 4U FRN125F1S 4U FRN150F1S 4U FRN200F1S 4U FRN250F1S 4U FRN300F1S 4U FRN350F1S 4U FRN400F1S 4U FRN450F1S 4U FRNSOOF1S 4U FRN600F1S 4U FRN700F1S 4U FRN800F1S 4U FRN900F1S 4U Three phase 460 V 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 W W o W W o DCR DCR DCR DCR 2 5 ERE Recommended wire size mm MCCB or Main power RCD GFCI input 7 Rated current L1 R L2 S L3 T Inverter s grounding 6G Inverter outputs 7 U V W 150 175 200 250 300 350 100 35 50 16x2 150 175 200 250 50 25x2 95 50x2 70x2 95x2 240 35x2 50x2 22 70x2 350 500 N gt O fe 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 10 15 20 30 4 0 A O 50 100 FRN040F1S 4U 15 O O al Ql O 125 175 200 250 300 200 35 25x2 16x2 25x2 o Es 00 O1 gt lt N 50x2 70x2 185 500 240 150x2 das 185x2 800 240x2 185x3 240x3 185x4 185x3 240x3 185x4 1000 1200 i b Control circuit Europe type terminal block DC reactor P1 P Aux control power supply RO TO 4 0 7 FRNOO7F1s 2U_ 40 75 60 10
114. Selection of life judgment criteria of the DC link bus capacitors Allows you to select the criteria for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor s reservoir capacitor s between factory default setting and your own choice Before specifying the criteria of your own choice measure and confirm the reference p oe level in advance For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 5 72 Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitors Whether the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Load may vary significantly in the following cases Disable the judgment on the life during operation and either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the actual use conditions e Auxiliary input for control power is used e An option card or multi function keypad is used e Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is c
115. T O01hH00m005s Ima x 0 00A lave 0 OOA BPave 0 0 LOADF AC TOREA S Q T O02hHO00m008 Imax 0 OOA lave 0 ODA BPave 0 0 Mer een wemmen AY T 01h59m59s Imax 0 OOA lave 0 OOA 0 0 BPave mer won wommer AV T O01hH00m005 Imax 2869 44 lave 182 2A BPave 24 0 Mor wena wemmen AY Mode selection screen Select desired mode of measurement by moving the cursor with N Q key Select desired mode of measurement with N V key Press key to finalize desired mode of measurement Set time duration Default 1 hour To go back to Mode selection press eset key Set the duration by using N V and keys Press key to finalize the duration and start measurement Measurement in progress remaining time While the measurement is in progress the remaining time is displayed When key is pressed or the measurement duration has elapsed the measurement stops displaying the results Specified duration Max output current Average output current Average braking power Display of measurement results Figure 3 26 Menu Transition for LOAD FCTR hours set mode 3 39 3 Selecting start to stop mode MODE SELECT HOURS SET START STOP EXECUTING LOADFAC TORS iki START BY RUN Imax 0 OOA lave 0 OOA BPave 0 0 Run com EXECUTING Imax 0 OOA lave 0 OOA BPave 0 0 LOADFACTOR Ui Stopped G END Imax 289 4A lave 182 2A BP
116. T i e The shaded function codes L are applicable to the quick setup 1 If the carrier frequency is set at 1 kHz or below estimate the maximum motor output torque at 80 or less of the rated motor torque 2 33 is displayed but it is reserved for paticular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access this function code 5 5 F code continued Data setting range Terminal FMI Oto 200 Voltage oulput adjustment Output adjustment Function Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value PV DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Test analog output PID process command SV Load Selection Variable torque load increasing in proportion to Auto Torque Boost square of speed Auto Energy Saving Variable torque load increasing in proportion to Operation square of speed Higher startup torque required Auto torngue boost Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load increasing in proportion to square of speed Higher startup torque required Note Apply this setting to a load with short acceleration time Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost Note Apply this setting to a load with long acceleration time F43 Current Limiter Disable No current limiter works Mode selection 1 Enable at constant speed
117. This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or the DC braking is in operation E Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms For details of the overload prevention control refer to the descriptions of function code H70 E Current detected ID Function code data 37 This output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms This signal goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level a Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but Note l i also for the operation level of the current detection ID For details of the current detection refer to the descriptions of function codes E34 and E35 HM Low output torque detected U TL Function code data 45 This output signal comes ON when the torque value calculated by the inverter decreases below the level specified by E80 Detect low torque Detection level for the time longer than the one specified by E81 Detect low torque Timer The minimum ON duration is 100 ms For details of the low output torque detection refer to the description
118. V set the bias reference point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain reference point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V set the gain reference point to 50 C34 50 Cote The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any reference points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of FRENIC5000G11S P11S series FVR E11S series etc F20 to F22 DC Braking Braking start frequency Braking level and Braking time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents the motor from running by inertia during deceleration to stop operation If the motor enters a deceleration to stop operation by turning off the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking start frequency F20 Setting the braking time to 0 0 F22 0 disables the DC braking Output Frequency Start of Coast to stopping Hz DC Braking Braking Start Frequency F20 0 Time DC Braking I Braking Time DC Braking Braking Level F21 0 ae Time DC Braking Braking Response Mode H95 DC Braking Current Tin Itis also po
119. X male which should be configured with a jumper according to the power source voltage and frequency Set the jumper to U1 or U2 depending upon the power source voltage applied to the main power inputs L1 R L2 S L3 T or auxiliary power input terminals R1 T1 for fans as shown in Figure 2 16 2 18 E Fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W for models of 50HP or above 208 V or 75HP or above 460 V The standard FRENIC Eco series of inverters also accept DC linked power input in combination with a power regenerative PWM converter RHC series Even when you drive the inverter with a DC linked power however you also need to supply AC power for models of 50HP or above 208 V or 75HP or above 460 V since it contains components such as AC fans that are driven by AC power In this case reinstall the connectors CN R and CN W to the and positions respectively and supply the power to the auxiliary power input terminals R1 T1 For the actual procedure refer to Figures 2 14 to 2 16 below CNote On the fan power supply switching connectors CN R and CN W the jumpers are installed at and positions respectively by factory default Do not relocate the jumper unless you drive the inverter with a DC linked power supply If there is a mistake in the installation of the jumpers for the switching connectors the cooling fan will not run causing a heat sink overheating alarm i4 or a charger circuit error alarm
120. act between 30B and 30C is closed For example when terminal Y1 is ON terminals Y2 and Y3 are OFF the contact between Y5A and Y5C is opened and the link between 30A and 30C is closed the status is expressed as 0101H Table 3 11 Hexadecimal Notation Data Displayed saath eee input signal signal RST y XRY XF ox 0x4 1x 1x2 pay REV FWD Highest digit Lowest digit 30A B Y5A 0005H unassigned XF XR RST are for communications Refer to the subsection below E Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control During control via communication input commands sent via RS 485 communications can be displayed in two ways depending on setting of the function code S06 Display with ON OFF of the LED segment or In hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communications control I O display is in normal logic ON when active using the original signals that are not inverted Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual for details on input commands sent through RS 485 communications and the instruction manual of communication related options as well 3 22 3 4 6 Reading maintenance information 5 MAINTENANC Menu 5 MAINTENANC in Programming Mode allows you to view information necessary for
121. actor MC already installed and built in surge suppressor from the inverter s output secondary circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the primary circuit ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result If frequent starts or stops are required during motor operation use FWD REV signals or the RUN STOP key The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type general purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a current lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter s output Secondary circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Do not connect a surge suppressor to the inverter s output Secondary circuit Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to satisfy EMC Directives
122. ad gt Change the setting of FOO from 1 to 0 or input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the function code data gt Press the key after changing the function code data The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are concurrently turned ON gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV 6 7 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor E Quick reference table of alarm codes code TW I iL Instantaneous overcurrent Charger circuit fault 14 TW 2 LiL I Electronic thermal overload relay 6 LiF Inside of the inverter overheat 6 12 E F Data saving error during undervoltage 6 18 12 RS 485 communications error co Li Motor protection PTC thermistor 6 Option card EH LSI error Power PCB 1 dn Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level i Overcurrent occurred during acceleration iL Overcurrent occurred during deceleration Li 7 Overcurrent occurred when running at a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W terminals were and measure the interphase resistance of the wires Check if the resistance short circuited is too low gt Remove the part that short circuited includin
123. alog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals CM s and CMY 2 29 Table 2 10 Continued Symbol Name Functions Y1 Transistor 1 Various signals such as inverter running speed freq arrival and overload early output 1 warning can be assigned to any terminals Y1 to Y3 by setting function code E20 E21 and E22 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Overview of Function Codes for Maximum load current details 2 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 to Y3 and CMY If the logic value for ON between Y1 to Y3 and CMY is 1 in the normal Y2 Transistor output 2 Leakage current at OFF Y3 Transistor Figure 2 26 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC output 3 logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Transistor output circuit specification lt Control Circuit gt Photocoupler Current AVS to 35V Voltage Figure 2 25 Transistor Output Circuit Note When a transistor output drives a control relay connect a surge absorbing diode across relay s coil terminals When any equipment or device connected to the transistor output needs to be supplied with DC power feed the power 24 VDC allowable range 22 to 27 VDC 50 mA max through the PLC terminal Short circuit between the terminals
124. also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given E inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Current limiter Mode selection and Level e Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 e Automatic deceleration H69 3 Note When the IOL signal is ON it may mean that the output frequency may have deviated from or dropped below the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this limiting function E Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the reference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 3 Enable restart Continue to run 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand 5 55 E Motor
125. an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the inverter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been approved in advance These motors have a larger rated current than general purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their braking power must be supplied from the primary circuit If the brake power is connected to the inverter s output circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with series connected brakes If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Use the inverter within
126. ancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start The shaded function codes L are applicable to the quick setup 5 3 F code continued Code x1 F09 F10 Fil Fi2 Fia F15 F16 F18 F20 F21 F22 F23 F25 Name Torque Boost Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Select motor characteristics Overload detection level Thermal time constant Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection Frequency Limiter Bias High Low Frequency command 1 DC Braking Braking start frequency Braking level Braking time Data setting range 0 0 to 20 0 Percentage of the rated voltage at base frequency FO5 Note This setting is effective when F37 0 1 3 or 4 For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan gt For inverter dnven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan 0 00 Disable 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the motor Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after a recovery from power failure Enable restart Continue to run for heavy inertia or general loads Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occured for general loads Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load to 60 Rated output current of the inverter interpreted as 100
127. anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor outputs Y1 through Y3 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched on and off at one second intervals 5 52 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3 Y5A C and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON ont Functions assigned Symbol Switch motor drive source between commercial power and SW88 inverter output For MC on commercial line Switch motor drive source between commercial power and SW52 2 inverter output For primary side Switch motor drive source between commercial power and l SW52 1 inverter output For secondary side a 1015 Select AX terminal function For MC on primary side AX og 1025 Cooling fan in operation FAN og 1026 Auto resetting TRY op 1027 Universal DO U DO og 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH 1030 Service life alarm LIFE g 1033 Command loss detected REF OFF 1035 RUN2 1036 Overload prevention control OLP 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 1 2 3 5 7 10 11 12 13 15 5 6 7 8 30 33 35 36 37 2 3 4 5 54 55 56 59 gg 1059 Terminal C1 off signal C1OFF so 1080 wt 5 53 Cote A mark in the Active OFF column means that a
128. arameters stored in the inverter When initialization is complete data of P03 P0O6 P0O7 and P08 and the old related internal data are automatically updated For P99 enter the following data according to the motor type e P99 0 Fuji standard 8 series motors Current standard e P99 3 Fuji standard 6 series motors Conventional standard e P99 4 Other manufacturer s or unknown motors Note If P99 4 Other motors the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Fuji Qu standard 8 series Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code settings to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press and N keys or 6 and V keys simultaneously Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor parameters in accordance with P02 rated capacity and P99 motor selection 2 Function codes subject to initialization P01 P03 P06 P0O7 and P08 including the internal control constants e To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes as follows 1 P02 Motor Rated Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW or HP Capacity 2 P99 Motor Selection Select the characteristics of the motor Refer to the descript
129. art torque A motor may be over excited at no load Constant torque load Auto torque boost Variable General purpose fans and torque load Torque boost pumps specified by If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the linear torque it is recommended to apply the linear V f pattern factory default 5 28 Fa FRENIC Eco is a series of inverters exclusively designed for fans and pumps whose Note i torque loads are characterized by a term of variable torque load that is a torque load increasing proportional to square of the load speed FRENIC Eco cannot drive any linear torque load even if you select a linear V f pattern If you attempt to drive a linear torque load with a FRENIC Eco inverter the inverter s current limit function may be activated or an insufficient torque situation may result and you would need to reduce the inverter output For details contact your Fuji Electric representative E f characteristics The FRENIC Eco series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high start torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage V Output voltage V R Rated volt 100 Rated voltage 100 ee Ula Output Torque Output boost ae boost g frequency Base Hz nan Hz requenc requency F0
130. ath the LCD Monitor indicate the running status and the source of Run command Running Rotational Status Direction Operation Guide lt 4 Aa 4 4 FWD REV STOP REM LOC Figure 3 3 Display of Running Status The running status and the rotational direction are displayed as shown in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Running Status and Rotational Direction Status Direction Description RUN The Run command is present or the inverter is driving the motor Running status Soe i STOP The Run command is not present or the inverter is in stopped state FWD Forward Rotational direction REV Reverse Blank Stopped 2 When function code E45 LCD Monitor optional is set to 1 the LCD Monitor displays the output frequency output current and calculated torque in a bar chart The indicators above the LCD Monitor indicate the unit of the number displayed on the LED Monitor the indicators underneath the LCD Monitor indicate the running status and the source of Run command r min m min kW X10 min sec PID Y Output Frequency Output Current Calculated Torque The full scale maximum value for each parameter is as follows Output frequency Maximum frequency Output current 200 of inverter s rated current Calculated torque 200 of rated torque generated by motor Figure 3 4 Bar Chart E Switching the operation mode between remote and local The inverter can be operated either in remote mode or in loca
131. ation and alarm information set function codes monitor I O signal status copy data and calculate the load factor 7 segment LED monitor i I A At a a Hz A Vv a nmin mmin KW x10 min sec PID FWE REV STOP REM Loc CO AM HXi HAND LED indicator indexes Program key AN RUN key fw b forward LED indicator Shift key 7 RUN key reverse Reset key STOP key UP key Remote Local Function Data key key DOWN key Table 3 1 Overview of Keypad Functions Monitor LED Item se ie Functions indicator or Key Five digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes E In Running Mode Running status information e g output frequency current and voltage E In Programming Mode same as above E In Alarm Mode Alarm code which identifies the cause of alarm if the protective function is activated LED LCD Monitor LCD monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes RUN rye E in Running Mode Running status information PRGs FRG MENU E In Programming Mode Menus function codes and their data Fie LED SHIFT a a E In Alarm Mode Alarm code which identifies the cause of alarm if the protective function is activated In running mode display the unit of the number displayed on the LED monitor and the running status information shown on the LCD monitor For details see next page Fe p i Switches the operation m
132. ave 24 0 LOADFACTOR Mode selection screen Select desired mode of measurement by moving the cursor IAN CN with N v key Confirmation screen If OK press G amp S key To go back to Mode selection press eset key Press key to signal Ready Waiting for Run command Standby for measurement Upon receiving Run command the measurement will start If a Run command has already been received this screen will be skipped Measurement will start upon receiving Run command Measurement in progress The measurement will continue until the inverter is stopped To discontinue the measurement press key Measurement will stop when the inverter is stopped or you press key Duration Max output current Display of measurement Average output current results Average braking power To return to Mode selection press eset key Figure 3 27 Menu Transition for LOAD FCTR start to stop mode 4 Going back to Running mode While the measurement of the load factor is in progress you can go back to the running mode by pressing the rd key or to the Mode selection screen by pressing the eset key In these cases the measurement of the load factor will continue You can go back to 9 LOAD FCTR and confirm on the Mode selection screen that the measurement is in progress After the measurement has ended you can view the results of the measurement by pressing the gt key on the Mode selection
133. be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer All circuits with terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T RO TO R1 T1 must have a common disconnect and be connected to the same pole of the disconnect if the terminals are connected to the power supply MCCB Disconnect or MC GFCI etc _ _ _____ _ FRENIC ECO viii Conformity with UL standards and CSA standards cUL listed for Canada continued ACAUTION 7 Install UL listed fuses or circuit breaker between the power supply and the inverter referring to the table below Required torque Wire size Ib in N m AWG mm Aux conte Aux vont Inverter type circuit circuit Control Mai Control aes l eons aa ole eed erminal suoply type Supply type RO TO terminal RO TO terminal block m 15 9 2 1 1 8 FRNOO5F1S 2U 12 3 3 336 gt FRNO10F1S 2U 3 8 ere FRNO25F1S 2U 2 33 6 119 4 13 5 pa FRNOSOF1S 2U 3 0 85 0 FRNO60F1S 2U 238 9 4 0 107 2 ea aaa FRNO75F1S 2U 27 300 152 FRN100F1S 2U 2 0x2 67 4 350 350 FRN125F1S 2U pr 4 0x2 107 2 FRNOO1F1S 4U FRNOO2F1S 4U FRNOO3F1S 4U FRNOOSF 1S 4U FRNOO7F1S 4U 3 8 pa FRNO40F1S 4U FRNO50F1S 4U FRNO60F1S 4U FRNO75F1S 4U RN100F1S 4U RN125F1S 4U FRN150F1S 4U 250 127 424 7 Power supply voltage Class J fuse size A Circuit breaker trip size Three phase 208 Three phase 460 V K o1 O K ol O o1 2 O Ql Q O 48 S
134. ble logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 FWD or REV ON or OFF In circuit a the switch SW1 has been turned to SINK whereas in circuit b it has been turned to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns ON or OFF control signal X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC Programmable Be ss Programmable a ani as Contoraller lt Control Circuit Coe eae lt Control Circuit gt KI PLC a SOURCE 24 VDC l l l I Liiu O O i C X1 to X5 X1 to X5 FWD REV Photocoupler FWD REV Photocoupler Q CM a With the switch turned to SINK b With the switch turned to SOURCE Figure 2 24 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC For details about the slide switch setting refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate 2 28 Classifi cation wy J Q J O D 2 lt lt Table 2 10 Continued Symbol Functions FMA The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 V or analog DC curre
135. by a problem of the printed circuit board PCB on which the CPU is mounted Contact your Fuji Electric representative 24 amp RS 485 communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 Conditions for communications differ between the inverter and host equipment Even though no response error detection time y18 has been set communications did not occur cyclically Host equipment e g PLCs and personal computers did not operate due to incorrect settings and or defective software hardware Relay converters e g RS 485 relay converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings and defective hardware A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no response error detection time invalid y18 0 Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS 485 relay converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate 6 18 Possible Causes 5 Broken communications cable or poor contact 6 A high intensity noise was given to the inverter 7 The
136. cess the PID process command with those keys Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual for details on the PID control m Setting the PID process command with and V keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 Keypad operation 2 Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor E43 0 while the keypad is in Running Mode You cannot modify the PID process command using the O V key while the keypad is in Programming Mode or Alarm Mode To enable the modification of the PID process command by the N v key first switch to Running Mode 3 Press the Q V key to have the PID process command displayed The lowest digit will blink together with the dot on the LED monitor r min m min kW X10 min sec PID Y 7Y Y Y Y Y Y 7Y Means that the keypad lt P I D REF gt command is effective H A N D4 O 0 O00 10 FYD STORE A A A a A A A FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Figure 3 7 PID Process Commands 4 To change the PID process command press the AN V key again The PID process command you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverters internal memory It is kept there even if you temporarily switch to another means of specifying the PID process command and then go back to the means of specifying the PID process command via the keypad Also it is kept there even while the inverter is powered OFF and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is powered ON 3 1
137. cluding its rotation direction and the inverter output frequency the frequency shift by auto search operation is terminated Forward Forward Reverse Reverse Pattern 2 Pattern 4 Forward Forward Hir Reverse Reverse Only when the auto search has not succeeded at the first trial the starting from the opposite direction is attempted Starting Patterns ote Auto search operation is attempted using one of the patterns shown above If not succeeded it will be tried again If seven consecutive retries failed the inverter will issue i 7 alarm and stop ON H11 Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the mode of deceleration when a run command is turned OFF Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by HO7 Acceleration deceleration pattern and F08 Deceleration time 1 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output The motor stops according to the inertia of motor and load machinery and their kinetic energy losses gen When the reference frequency is low the inverter decelerates the motor according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop 5 68 H12 H30 y98 RS 485 Communications RS 485 Communications Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcu
138. ct output modes Active ON Terminals Y5A and Y5C are closed excited if the signal is active and Active OFF Terminals Y5A and Y5C are opened non excited if the signal is active while they are normally closed 1 Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to stop the motor Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5Al 2 Any one of output signals assigned to terminals Y1 to Y3 can also be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output 3 Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the following two contact output modes Terminals 30A and 30C are closed excited for ON signal output Active ON or Terminals 30B and 30C are closed non excited for ON signal output Active OFF Used to connect the inverter with PC or PLC using RS 485 port The inverter supplies the power to the keypad through the pins specified below The extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to these pins for supplying the keypad power Remove the keypad from the standard RJ 45 connector and connect the RS 485 communications cable to control the inverter through the PC or PLC Programmable Logic Controller Refer to Section 2 3 8 Setting up slide switches and handling control circuit terminal symbol plate for setting of the terminating resistor 5 VDC GND Terminating RJ 45 Connector Resistor Sw3 RJ 45 Connector Face
139. ction will be displayed 2 Select 4 l O CHECK by using Q and 3 keys moving gt 3 Press the key to display the screen for I O Checking 1 page out of a total of 6 pages 4 Select the page for the desired item by using O and V keys and confirm the I O check data for the desired item 5 Press the key to go back to the menu Figure 3 15 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 4 I O CHECK menu 3 20 3 QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK OPR MNTR AV gt MENU SHIFY 1 2 3 E4 DATA CHECK OPR MNTR I O CHECK AV MENU SHI F IYO CHECKA Select desired menu by moving the pointer with WY key ney ae Press Gas key to finalize desired menu Input signal at control circuit terminal block Highlighted when short circuited normal when open Input signal coming via communication link Highlighted when 1 normal when 0 Output signal Highlighted when ON normal when OFF I O signal hex Input signal at control circuit terminal block Output signal Input signal coming via communication link Analog input signal Input voltage at terminal 12 Input current at terminal C1 Input voltage at terminal V2 Analog output signal Output voltage at terminal FMA Output current at terminal FMA Average output voltage at terminal FMP Pulse rate at terminal FMP Figure 3 15 Menu Transition for I O CHECK 3 21 Common operation To confirm data call the
140. ctory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a terminating device turn SW3 to ON SW5 Switches property of the analog input terminal V2 for V2 or PTC When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code H26 Analog frequency command in voltage V2 Factory default 3 SW4 Switches the output mode of the analog output terminal FMA between voltage and current When changing this switch setting also change the data of function code F29 Voltage output Factory default 2 34 Figure 2 29 shows the location of slide switches for the input output terminal configuration Switching example SINK H Control Circuit Terminal Block Figure 2 29 Location of the Slide Switches 2 4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad 2 4 1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection 1 Mounting style You can mount a keypad in any style described below HM Mounting a keypad on the enclosure wall Refer to Figure 2 30 E Installing a keypad at a remote site e g for operation on hand Refer to Figure 2 31 Enclosure Multi function Keypad back Multi function Inverter Keypad Inverter Remote Operation Screws for fixing Remote Operation Extension Cable or LAN cable Multi function Keypad Extension Cable or LAN cable Figure 2 30 Mounting Multi function Keypad on the Figure 2 31 Installing Multi function Keypad at a Enclosure Wall Remote Site e g f
141. ctronic thermal function for motor overload detection was activated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the motor characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 gt Use an external thermal relay Check the continuous allowable current of the motor gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration deceleration This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 and F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 In winter the load tends to increase Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the enclosure well Check the setting of FO9 torque boost and make sure that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall gt Adjust the setting of F09 Recalculate the required acceleration deceleration torque and time from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 and F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning
142. d DWP dew condensation prevention to one of general purpose digital input terminals function code data 39 E Enabling Dew Condensation Prevention To enable dew condensation prevention turn ON the condensation prevention command DWP while the inverter is stopped Then this feature starts E Dew Condensation Prevention Duty J21 The magnitude of the DC power applied to the motor is the same as the setting of F21 DC Braking Braking level and its duration inside each interval is the same as the setting of F22 DC Braking Braking time The interval T is determined so that the ratio of the duration of the DC power to T is the value Duty set for J21 2 x 100 Duty for condensation prevention J21 T i T A me DC Braking Braking Time F22 i DC Applied DC Braking Braking Level F21 Condensation Prevention Cycle 5 76 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting If any of the protective functions have been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to off reset the alarm Note that if the alarm is reset while any run commands are set to on the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may cause the motor to rotate Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T voltage may be output
143. d individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are required for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Eco series of inverters Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC Eco series of inverters comply Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual K Minis This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents C Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations ann This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information
144. d its reference point C34 C39 or C44 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 that of C37 and C39 to C1 and that of C42 and C44 to V2 Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 or C42 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias reference point C50 and gain reference point C34 C39 or C44 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 The analog input less than the bias reference point C50 is limited by the bias value Note F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias reference point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain reference point C34 C39 or C44 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency FY Clee ner See eee C32 C37 or C42 Bias F18 Point A L S H Analog input 0 Bia Gain 100 Reference Reference Point Point C50 C34 C39 or C44 Example Setting the bias gain and its reference points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 100 Bias F18 0 Analog input 01 K 0 ey 100 Bias Gain Reference Reference Point C50 Point C34 5 40 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias reference point and it is equal to 10 of 10
145. d where the peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections Measure the input voltage and check the voltage variation gt Reconsider the power system configuration Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt Reconsider the capacity of the power source transformer Problem Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large Possible Causes 1 Main circuit power input wires broken 2 The terminal screws for the main circuit power input of the inverter were not tight enough What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the wires Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become loose Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 6 10 Possible Causes 3 Interphase unbalance rate of three phase voltage was too large Overload cyclically occurred Single phase voltage was input to the inverter instead of three phase voltage input What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter capacity Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage gt If the ripp
146. des This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Eco series of inverter For details of the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES FOO F01 C30 Data Protection Specifies whether function code data is to be protected from being accidentally changed by keypad operation If data protection is enabled F00 1 the N w key operation to change data is disabled so that no function code data except FOO data can be changed from the keypad To change F00 data simultaneous keying of f N from 0 to 1 or E v from 1 to 0 keys is required Even when FO0 1 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals For details refer to function codes E01 to E05 E98 and E99 Frequency Command 1 Frequency Command 2 F01 selects the source of reference frequency 1 F01 or reference frequency 2 C30 for specifying the output frequency of the inverter motor speed Data for Function F01 C30 Enable AIG keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE MULTI FUNCTION KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Enable the current input to terminal
147. desired page using A V key Press e key to return to Menu E Hexadecimal expression Each I O terminal is assigned to one of the 16 binary bits bit O through bit 15 The bit to which no I O terminal is assigned is considered to have a value of 0 The I O signals are thus collectively expressed as a hexadecimal number 0 through F In the FRENIC Eco Series digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bits O and 1 and X1 through X5 to bits 2 through 6 respectively Each bit assumes a value of 1 when the corresponding signal is ON and a value of 0 when it is OFF Note For example when signals FWD and X1 are ON while all the other signals are OFF the status is expressed as 0005H Note The ON OFF state of each signal at terminals FWD REV and X1 through X5 is to be interpreted according to the states of the source sink switch as shown in Table 2 8 in Chapter 2 of the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Digital output terminals Y1 through Y3 are assigned to bits 0 through 2 Each is given a value of 1 when it is short circuited to CMY or a value of 0 when its circuit to CMY is open The status of relay output terminal Y5A C is assigned to bit 4 which assumes a value of 1 when the contact between Y5A and Y5C is closed The status of relay output terminal 30A B C is assigned to bit 8 which assumes a value of 1 when the contact between 30A and 30C is closed or 0 when the cont
148. display the motor speed on the LED monitor refer to function code E43 The following formula is used for the conversion Motor speed r min eee x Frequency Hz No of poles Motor Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Dependency on function code P99 0 01 to 1000 5 61 P03 P04 POG P0O7 P08 Motor Rated current PO3 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Motor Auto tuning This function automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in the inverter s internal memory Basically you do not need to perform tuning if you use a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases you may not obtain the best performance under auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring or auto energy saving operation by default settings since the motor parameters are different from that of Fuji standard motors In such a case perform auto tuning e The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor e Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Motor No load curren
149. e Inverter Out of Running Out of Running Running State Gate OFF In Running Gate ON Gate OFF Motor Sound Carrier frequency Motor Sound Tone E Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output Secondary wirings 5 42 F29 F30 F31 Cote Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a oe large amount of ripples many harmonics components As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overheat alarm TWIT UW 11 Liz or inverter overload alarm iai With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled see function code H98 E Motor sound Tone F27 F12 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F
150. e is 100 CNote If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both H42 and H47 Check whether there has bi been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met CNote The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment Electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and check the accumulated run time of the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor adjusted with ambient temperature and is used as the basis for judging whether it has reached its service life The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours 3 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the accumulated run ti
151. e If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with N and 4 keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the amp key If you press the key without pressing the amp key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation y Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with N and 3 keys the change will not take effect Pressing the amp key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory E Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with
152. e Name Data setting range x1 2 Orange Daa Defautt Peter Unit when acted setin ta running yng 9 page HB0 Gain for Suppression of 0 00 to 0 40 0 01 Y Y Refer to Output Current Fluctuation table for Motor below HBG Reserved 2 Yi 2 poe Revonese owas ee se H89 Motor overload memory O Inactive Y Y retention 1 Active wojen o SSSSCSCSCS J H91 C1 disconnection detection 0 0 Disable 0 1 Y 0 0 5 70 time 0 1 to 60 0 Detection time PLD control feedback line H92 Continue to Run 0 000 to 10 000 999 1 0 001 Times Y Y1 P component gain Y2 H93 l component time 0 010 to 10 000 999 1 0 001 Y Y1 2 HS4 Cumulative Run Time of Change or reset the cumulative data S71 Motor HS5 DC Braking 0 Slow Y 5 4 Braking response mode 1 Quick STOP Key Priority Data STOP key priority Start check function y 3 fi enable fose fs erame fenm HS Clear Alarm Data Setting H97 data to 1 clears alarm data and then returns Y 5 71 to zero H g Protection Oto 63 Display data on the keypad s LED monitor in Y Y Maintenance Function decimal format In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled Lower the carrier frequency automatically Detect input phase loss Detect output phase loss Select life judgment criteria of DC link bus capacitor Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Detect DC fan lock When you make settings from the keypad th
153. e ON by disconnection detection The input current on the terminal C1 is less than 2mA The terminal C1 is used for the feedback input value of PID control E62 5 Under the PID control 5 71 H94 H97 H98 Cumulative Run Time of Motor You can view the cumulative run time of the motor on the keypad This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system With this function code H94 you can set the cumulative run time of the motor to any value you choose For example by specifying 0 you can clear the cumulative run time of the motor Note The data for H94 is in hexadecimal notation Check the cumulative run time of the motor on the keypad Clear Alarm Data H97 deletes the information such as alarm history and data at the time of alarm occurrence including alarms that have occurred during the check up or adjustment of the machinery Data is then brought back to a normal state without an alarm Deleting the alarm information requires simultaneous keying of Gros and O keys Clear all This data clears all alarm data stored and returns to 0 Protection Maintenance Function H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of the carrier frequency b protection against input phase loss c protection against output phase loss and d judgment on the DC link bus capacitor life and the change of judgment criteria on the DC link bus capacitor life and the selection of
154. e all internally To improve cooling efficiently you can take the heat sink out of the equipment or the enclosure as shown on the right so that cooling is done both internally and externally this is called external cooling In external cooling the heat sink which dissipates about 70 of the total heat total loss generated into air is situated outside the equipment or the enclosure As a result much less heat is radiated inside the equipment or the enclosure To take advantage of external cooling you need to use the external cooling attachment option for inverters with a capacity of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or simply re position the mounting bases for the cooling unit for inverters with a capacity of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above In an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust however do not use external cooling in an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust which tends to clog the heat sink For details refer to the Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 Installation Manual and FRENIC Eco User s Manual ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident External Heat Radiation 70 Internal Heat Radiation 30 S Cooling Fans Internal Fans Sink Internal Air In
155. e capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during an ordinary power off time by taking on assuming its discharging condition during a power off time under the ordinary operation condition at the end user s installation Presented below is the procedure for taking on the discharging condition during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement will appear on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitanc
156. e causing resonance 6 5 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time Possible Causes 1 2 7 The inverter ran the motor by S curve or curvilinear pattern The current limiting prevented the output frequency from increasing during acceleration The automatic regenerative braking was active Overload Torque generated by the motor was insufficient An external frequency command is being used The V2 PTC switch was turned to PTC when V2 was being used What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern gt Select the linear pattern HO7 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that the setting of F44 Current limiter level is reasonable gt Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter in F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time FO7 F08 Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 Measure the output current gt Lighten the load In the case of a fan or a pump load lower the setting data of the F15 Frequency limiter high In winter the load tends to increase Check that the motor starts running if the value of the
157. e center of the inverter with the base fixing screws using case fixing screw holes Secure the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter with the base fixing screws For models shown in Figure B Remove all of the base fixing screws from the top and bottom of the inverter Also remove the case fixing SCrews Secure the top mounting base to the center of the inverter with the base fixing screws using case fixing screw holes Set the removed case fixing screws to the screw holes where the top mounting bases were secured 3 In the same way secure the bottom mounting base to the center of the inverter Base Fixing Screws _ Top Case Fixing Screws Mounting Bottom Mounting Base y Base Fixing Screws Figure A A TN MS Base Fixing Screws Top Mounting Case Fixing Screws Base Base Fixing Screws y Case Fixing Screws Figure B H I _ Bottom Mounting Base pi Sks Ti Ms i te i NS MS i M6 M5 14 M6 S k Figure 2 3 Relocating the Top and Bottom Mounting Bases ACAUTION When moving the top and bottom mounting bases use only the specified screws A fire or an accident may be caused 2 4 3 Mounting direction Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it securely with four screws or bolts so that the logo FRENIC Eco can be seen from the front Note Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat d
158. e currently selected frequency command Means that the keypad Hz A u r min my kit X10 min sec PID enot n GRE Y lt REMOTE REF gt 12 Means that the setting for the Analog 12 terminal is effective See Table below A A A a A a A FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND To have the frequency command displayed as the motor speed load shaft speed or speed set function code E48 speed monitor selection to 3 4 or 7 respectively as shown in Table 3 6 Monitored Items Table 3 4 Available Means of Setting Symbol Symbol Symbol HAND Keypad MULTI Multistep PID HAND PID keypad frequency command 12 Terminal 12 PID P1 PID process command 1 C1 Terminal C1 RS 485 1 RS 485 standard PID P2 Be dais command 2 12 C1 penne Tia RS 485 2 RS 485 optional PID U D Diy pene Terminal C1 process command PID V2 Terminal V2 BUS Bus option PID_LINK communication process command PID multistep U D UP DOWN control LOADER FRENIC loader PID MULTI frequency command E Make setting under PID control To enable PID control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 Under the PID control the items that can be set or checked with and V keys are different from those under regular frequency control depending upon the current LED monitor setting If the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor you may access manual speed commands frequency command with N and V keys if it is set to any other value you may ac
159. e cursor with N V key 0 1 0H2 1 Er2 2 0C 1 Press key to finalize desired alarm info Figure 3 17 Menu Transition for ALM INF 3 27 Press key to finalize desired alarm info Output frequency Output current Output voltage Calculated torque Frequency command Running direction status Cumulative run time No of startups DC link circuit voltage Temperature inside inverter Max temperature of heat sink Common operation Input signal status at terminal block To confirm data of control circuit call the desired page using N Highlighted when short circuited V key normal when opened Press key to return to Menu Terminal input signal status under communication control Highlighted when 1 normal when 0 Output signal Highlighted when ON normal when OFF Overlapping alarm 2 Overlapping alarm 1 Error sub code Figure 3 17 Menu Transition for ALM INF continued 3 28 3 4 8 Viewing cause of alarm 7 ALM CAUSE Menu 7 ALM CAUSE in Programming Mode allows you to view the information on the four most recent alarm conditions that triggered protective functions in alarm code and the number of occurrences It also shows the cause of each alarm Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select
160. e incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 The H86 through H91 are displayed but they are reserved for particular manufacturers Unless otherwise specified do not access these function codes 5 16 J codes Application Functions Change Data setting range when Baa pis 168 running pying a J01 PID Control Disable Mode selection i Enable normal operation Enable inverse operation J02 Remote process 0 Enable O I V keys on keypad command 1 PID process command 1 Enable terminal command UP DOWN control Command via communications link m roan oconwsoowey oofa v v o w vmesno foowaomos fof w Foun foo fof a E S J11 Select alarm output 0 Absolute value alarm Absolute value alarm with Hold Absolute value alarm with Latch Absolute value alarm with Hold and Latch Deviation alarm Deviation alarm with Hold Deviation alarm with Latch Deviation alarm with Hold and Latch 72 Werintsem T E E aE a E E E J15 Stop frequency 0 Disable for slow flowrate 1 to 120 J16 Slow flowrate wale stop wiser all Starting frequency 0 Disable 1 to 120 J18 Upper limit of PID 1 to 120 process output 999 Depends on setting
161. e inverter exceeds the level prescribed in the EMC Directive enclose the inverter and its peripherals EMC compliant filter inside a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10 3 Connect the shield layer of the cable electrically to the metal enclosure Metal enclosure and the motor and make sure that both the metal enclosure and the EON FRENIC Eco motor are grounded supply eadein i EMC compliant O filter optional Note MCCB Three phase Shielded cable with overcurrent protection Figure 10 3 Installation of EMC Compliant Filter Option 10 5 4 EMC compliant environment and class The table below lists the capacity and power supply voltage of the FRENIC Eco and the EMC compliant environment Power Inverter capacity supply Standards voltage 1HP to 100HP for 208V 1HP to 125HP for 460V 125HP for 208V 150HP to 350HP EN61800 3 Second environment Industrial environment 208 V EN61800 3 Second environment Industrial environment EN61800 3 Second environment Industrial environment 3 phase 460 V Emission EN55011 EN61800 3 Second environment Group 1 Class A Industrial environment Note 1 Note 1 Wiring change for compliance Changing the internal wiring makes EMC compliant level emission be in conformity with Group 1 Class A Refer to the wiring procedures given on the following pages AWARNING Before changing any internal wiring turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for m
162. e motor run time Cumulative run time of electrolytic capacitor reference Cumulative run time of the cooling fan reference Number of start ups Input watt hour Input watt hour data No of errors amp Error content for RS 485 1 No of errors amp Error content for RS 485 2 No of errors amp Error code for Option communication ROM version of the inverter ROM version of the keypad ROM version of the option Figure 3 16 Menu Transition for MAINTENANC 3 25 Common operation To confirm data call the desired page using N Q key Press key to return to Menu 3 4 7 Reading alarm information 6 ALM INF Menu 6 ALM INF in Programming Mode allows you to view the information on the four most recent alarm conditions that triggered protective functions in alarm code and the number of occurrences It also shows the status of the inverter when the alarm condition occurred Table 3 13 lists the details of the alarm information Table 3 13 Alarm Information Displayed Running direction FWD Forward REV Reverse Blank Stopped Running status IL current limitation LU undervoltage VL voltage limitation Shows the cumulative power ON time of the inverter Cumulative run time When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the display will be reset to 0 and the count will start again Shows the cumulative count of times the motor has been started the inverter Count of startups run command has been issued W
163. e specified resetting retry times the inverter issues an alarm for any faults and does not attempt to escape the tripped state A WARNING If the retry function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault depending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur E Reset interval H05 HO05 specifies the interval time to attempt performing auto resetting the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagram below lt Operation timing scheme gt Alarm factor Protection function HO5 HO5 HO5 H05 Reset command ist 2nd 3rd 4th Inverter output frequency Auto reseting signal 0 Time 5 64 HOG H07 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and to reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan is stopped when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter is stopped However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life it is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started This function code H06 Cooling fan ON OFF control allows you to specify whether the cooling fan is to be kept running all the time or to be controlled ON OFF Data for H06 Cooling fan ON OFF Disable Always in operation Enable ON OFF controllable Acc
164. e the specific run command Run forward or Run run command reverse Note 1 Tuning the motor parameters Note 2 1 AT STOP EXECUTING End of tuning 1 AT STOP CLOSE BY RUN COMMAND OFF Turn off the Upon turning off the run command while the run run command command given by the keypad or the link operation is automatically turned off the lead through ends the tuning process and moves to the next function code P06 MaeasM SELECT AV 3FN CODE SH Note 1 The factory default setting is Run forward by using the wd key on the keypad To tune the motor parameters in Run reverse change data of the function code F02 Note 2 e Time needed for tuning while the motor is stopped P04 1 will be less than 40 seconds e In tuning while the motor is running P04 2 the inverter accelerates the motor up to around 50 of the base frequency starts tuning of motor parameters and decelerates to stop the motor after the end of tuning Estimated time needed for tuning in this case will be acceleration time 10 deceleration time seconds 3 46 Chapter4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Running the Motor for a Test 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on Check the following prior to starting powering on 1 Check if connection is correct Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T and output terminals U V and W respectively and that the g
165. eaker MCCB or a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power supply and the inverter Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity In addition to an MCCB or GFCI insert if necessary a magnetic contactor MC of the type recommended for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter Furthermore if the coil of the MC or solenoid comes into close contact with the inverter install a surge absorber in parallel To put the inverter on standby by making the control circuit only active with the main circuit power supply being opened connect this pair of wires to terminals RO and TO Without connecting this pair of wires to these terminals you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility 8 9 8 4 3 Running the inverter by terminal commands Power supply ron paese Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz or three phase x 380 to 480 V a Eae oi 50 60 Hz DCR Note 1 i Q Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 GFCI MC for control circuits Note 4 Aux power input for AC fans Grounding Note 6 terminal Power supply for potenti
166. ect Low Torque Oto 150 me Detection level Timer 0 01 to 600 00 1 5 60 1 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 5 10 E code continued Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown below assigns a negative logic input to a terminal 0 1000 SS1 1 oon Select multistep frequency SS2 2 1002 SS4 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 11 1011 Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 13 Enable DC brake DCBRK 15 Switch to commercial power 50 Hz SW50 16 Switch to commercial power 60 Hz SVW60 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable write from keypad Data changeable 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 22 1022 Interlock IL 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE 25 1025 Universal DI U DI 26 1026 Select starting characteristics STM 30 1030 Force to stop STOP 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential componen
167. ed in Remote Local switching the operation of the keypad concerning run commands varies with the setting of F02 For details refer to W Switching the operation mode between remote and local in Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 Maximum Frequency F03 specifies the maximum frequency at which the motor can run Specifying the frequency out of the range rated for the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Set a maximum frequency appropriate for the equipment ACAUTION The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Cote Modifying F03 data to apply a higher output frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high 5 25 F04 F05 H50 H51 Base Frequency Rated Voltage at Base Frequency Non linear V f Pattern Frequency Non linear V f Pattern Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function codes H50 and H51 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an i
168. ed on the nameplate FO nn TYPE _FRNOO7F1S 2U 2 SOURCE 3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz 42 7A type FRNOOJFI1S 20 OUTPUT i any 200 240V 0 1 120Hz 29A SERHo 75A123A00017 min SCCR_100kA 720 Fuji Electric FA Made in Japan a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter FRN 007 F1S 2U Code Series name a L Code Shipping destination FRN FRENIC series Instruction manual version Code Applicable motor rating U USA nglish 001 1HP 002 2HP 003 3HP 005 5HP Code Power supply voltage i i 2 Three phase 208 V 200 200HP 4 Three phase 460 V 250 250HP 300 300HP Code Enclosure 350 350HP S Standard IP20 IP00 Code Applicable area F Fan and pump application Code Development code 1 1 SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current overload capacity MASS Mass of the inverter in pound SER No Product number i 23A0001Z ar anaes Serial number of production lot Production month 1 to 9 January to September X Y or Z October November or December Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks 1 Outside and inside views
169. elect the rated current of a fuse or a circuit breaker which is suitable to the connecting wire size E Precautions for use In running general purpose motors In running special motors Environ mental conditions Driving a 460V general purpose motor Torque characteristics and temperature rise Noise Explosion proof motors Submersible motors and pumps Synchronous motors Single phase motors Installation location When driving a 460V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their reinforced insulation When the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s When
170. electric strength test of control circuit Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit Prepare a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground 1 MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied 7 6 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries report the following information to your Fuji Electric representative 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 3 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 6 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 2 Product warranty The term of product warranty is one year after the purchase or 24 months from the month and year of production specified on the nameplate whichever comes first However the product will not be repaired free of charge in the following cases even if the warranty term has not expired 1 T
171. eleration Deceleration Pattern HO7 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns Patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce the impact on the inverter driven motor and or its mechanical load during acceleration deceleration the inverter gradually accelerates decelerates the motor in both the acceleration deceleration starting and ending zones Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Output Frequency ACC Time DEC Time Reference _ Reference Maximum l Frequency F03 Time Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is more than 10 of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration deceleration time s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is more than 20 of the maximum frequency gt Accelerati
172. em requirements For details refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Name of peripheral equipment Function and application Molded case circuit breaker MCCB MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control board and inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T from overload or short circuit which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by the inverter malfunctioning RCDs GFCls function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and RCDs GFCls that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below Rated current of MCCB and GFCI A Residual current operated protective device RCD Ground fault circuit interrupter GFCl Input power source 3 phase Applicable motor rating HP Inverter type FRNOO1F1S 2U FRNOO2F1S 2U FRNOO3F1S 2U FRNOOSF1S 2U FRNOO7F1S 2U FRNO10F1S 2U FRNO15F1S 2U FRNO20F1S 2U FRNO25F1S 2U FRNO30F1S 2U FRNO40F1S 2U FRNOSOF1S 2U FRNO60F1S 2U FRNO75F1S 2U FRN100F1S 2U FRN125F1S 2U FRNOO1F1S 4U FRNOO2F1S 4U FRNOO3F1S 4U FRNOOSF1S 4U FRNOO7F1S 4U FRNO10F1S 4U FRNO15F1S 4U FRNO20F1S 4U FRNO25F1S 4U FRNO30F1S 4U FRNO40F1S 4U FRNOSOF1S 4U FRNO60F1S 4U with overcurrent protection Main peripheral equipment 100 FRNO75F1S 4U FRN100F1S 4U FRN125F1S 4U FRN150F1S 4U FRN200F1S 4U FRN250F1S 4U FRN300F1S 4U FRN350F1S 4U FRN400F1S 4U FRN450F1S 4U FRNSOOF1S 4U FRN600F1S 4U FRN700F1S 4U FRN
173. ent limiting operation did not increase the output frequency 9 Bias and grain set incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Lighten the load Adjust the damper of the fan or the value of the pump In winter the load tend to increase Check if mechanical brake is working Release the mechanical brake In case auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether P02 P03 P06 PO7 and P08 agree with the parameters of the motor gt Set P02 P03 and P06 properly and perform auto tuning in accordance with P04 Make sure that F43 Current limiter mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter level gt If the current limiting operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disabled Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then turn the power OFF and back on again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 and H51 to ensure that the V f pattern is right gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 C39 C42 and C44 gt Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring has been connected to the motor incorrectly 2 Incorrect connection and settings for
174. ered the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop the run command may be turned off In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for input of a run command after the inverter enters ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the data of F14 Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure will be canceled and the inverter needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay In case the run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the direction of rotation is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the direction of rotation is fixed F02 2 or 3 the direction of rotation is retained inside the inverter and the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power Failure Recovery i S DC Link Bus Voltage f Undervoltage Level batt Time Reserved for Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s Gate ON Command
175. ersonnel and ordinary citizens cUL listed for Canada means that the products have been evaluated to the CSA Standards by the UL Therefore CUL listed products are equivalent to those in conformity with CSA Standards 10 1 2 Considerations when using FRENIC Eco as a product certified by UL or cUL If you want to use the FRENIC Eco series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA Standards cUL listed for Canada certified product refer to the related guidelines described on pages viii and ix 10 2 Conformity with EU Directives The CE Marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 89 336 EEC issued by the Council of the European Communities and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EMC filter built in inverters that bear a CE Marking are in conformity with EMC Directives Inverters having no EMC filter can be in conformity with EMC Directives if an optional EMC compliant filter is mounted to them Inverters that bear a CE Marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive E The FRENIC Eco series of inverters is in conformity with the following standards Low Voltage Directive EN50178 1997 EMC Directive EN61800 3 1996 A11 2000 EN55011 1998 A1 1999 CAUTION The FRENIC Eco series of inverters is categorized as a restricted sales distribution class according to the EN61800 3 When you use these products in a domestic environment
176. erter driven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors 1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below lists the factors of the motor selected by P99 Motor Selection Actual Output Current Continuous Overload Detection Level F11 fb Base Frequency where If it exceeds 60 Hz fb 60 Hz i i pi Frequency 0 fe Bo fb 0 Hz Cooling Characteristics of Motor Equipped with a Self cooling Fan 5 31 Applicable Motor Rating and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor selection 0 or 4 Switching frequency Output current for setting the thermal for motor time constant characteristic factor HP Factory default 1 2 1 15 85 100 7 Hz o Base Base 75 to 125 10 min frequency frequency 51 95 95 150 or above Characteristic factor Applicable Thermal time motor rating constant t Switching frequency for motor characteristic factor Output current for setting the thermal time constant Imax Applicable Thermal time motor rating constant t HP Factory default 1 4 to 30 frequency Base Rated current ee 40 to 60 x 150 q o y x 33 frequency 75 to 125 10 mi
177. esesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 5 2 Overview of Function Codes eeeeeeeeee 5 23 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING cceeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 6 2 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 7 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 8 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed 6 19 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 1 Daily Inspection iiscacccsenes terete eee ee 7 1 7 2 Periodic Inspection cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life eee 7 3 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts AMan Grout sa tcsdes Sei xstenSiaeeio usd obi veanneteerdsuestenSsucods 7 5 7 5 Insulation TES cule a eee cleave eda 7 6 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 7 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 0 cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 Standard MOodels cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 1 Three phase 208 V cccccccscseeeeeeeeeeeees 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V cccccccscseeeeseeeeeeees 8 2 8 2 Specifications of Keypad Related 66 8 4 8 2 1 General specifications of keypad
178. eset key while the running status information is displayed will take you back to the display of the alarm code E Transition to Programming mode By pressing the rd key while alarm information is displayed you can switch to the Programming mode in which you can use a variety of features such as changing function code data E Resetting alarm transition to Running mode When you remove the cause of the alarm and press the eset key the alarm condition will be reset and the inverter will go back to the Running mode Figure 3 33 summarizes the menu transition between these modes Running Mode OQ 1 Er2 3 A KEYPD COM ERR PRG PRG MENU RESET RESET Programming Mode Occurrence of an alarm Alarm Mode oO ALM INF Foti Iout Vout T RQ ALM INFA Figure 3 33 Menu Transition in from Alarm Mode 3 44 3 6 Other Precautions For using a multi function keypad note that your key operation will be differed from ones on a standard keypad TP E1 for following points 3 6 1 Function code setting for F02 Run and operation The FuN Gr0 key controls to run stop the motor on the standard keypad TP E1 while the rotation command input is required On the contrary the fwo rev gror key on the multi function keypad controls to run forward reverse the motor without inputting any rotation command or stop it The function code F02 specifies the run command source to drive the motor 0 Keypad Pressing
179. esor vem ern 2 Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS 485 link Loader a Via RS 485 link Loader Via RS 485 link Loader pps ne TTT ONENE Via field bus option Follow H30 data Mode selection 9 Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data 1 Via RS 485 link Loader Follow H30 and y98 data 5 21 le E 208V Default setting _invertertype_ FOS F11 F12 E34 Po2 Po3 Poe Poz Pos H13 Hao Hae 2 FRN001F1S 2U 208 3 16 5 0 3 16 1 00 3 16 1 39 4 61 10 32 0 5 0 20 0 FRN002F1S 2U 208 6 16 5 0 6 16 2 00 6 16 2 53 5 04 9 09 0 5 0 20 0 FRNO03F1S 2U 208 8 44 5 0 8 44 3 00 8 44 3 23 3 72 24 58 0 5 0 20 0 FRNO05F1S 2U 208 13 60 5 0 13 60 5 00 13 60 4 32 3 99 2813 0 5 0 20 0 5 0 5 0 0 JFRNOO7F1S 2U 208 20 19 5 0 20 19 7 50 20 19 5 63 3 18 34 70 05 0 20 0 JFRNO1OF1S 2U 208 27 42 5 0 27 42 10 00 27 42 7 91 2 91 36 89 05 0 20 0 FRNO2OF1S 2U 208 53 98 5 0 53 98 20 00 53 98 8 32 2 54 35 90 1 0 FRNO25F1S 2U 65 49 0 65 49 25 00 65 49 15 10 38 01 0 126 60 126 60 26 60 E 460V Default setting Inverter type_ _FO P02 Po3_ Poe Po7 Pos FRN001F1S 4U 46 1 50 1 00 1 50 0 77 3 96 8 86 0 5 0 20 0 0 5 0 5 0 2 3 JFRNOO3F1S 4U 460 4 00 5 0 4 00 3
180. eter Motor ratings printed on the Rated capacity nameplate of the motor Pppiicable wictorratsd Capacity Motor parameter Ecd Rated current Rated current of applicable motor wg Notor Selection 0 Characteristic of motor O Fuji standard 8 series motors Z nJ System design values Maximum frequency For a test driving of the motor 60 0 Hz zon increase values so that they are Acceleration time 1 longer than your system design values If the set time is short the con TEE inverter may not start running the T wie Deceleration time 1 motor Tip In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring or auto energy saving since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure set forth below The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product e The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long e A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Referring to the rating plate on the motor set the following function codes to their nominal ratings e F04 Base frequency e F05 Rated voltage at Base frequency e P02 Rated capacity e PO3 Rated current 2 Selection of Tuning Process Check the situation of the machine system and choose between Tuning while the motor is sto
181. f Commercial Oto 120 Hz 999 999 Depends on setting of J18 This code is used to judge whether or not to mount a commercial power driven motor by checking the output frequency of the inverter driven motor Power driven Motor Duration 0 00 to 3600 Neral s v y Frequency Unmount of Commercial 0 to 120 Y Power driven Motor 999 Depends on setting of J19 Frequency Pump Control Mode selection 0 1 This code is used to judge whether or not to unmount a commercial power driven motor by checking the output frequency of the inverter driven motor 8 Duration 0 00 to 3600 Switching Time for Motor Mount Decl time 0 00 Depends on the setting of F08 0 01 to 3600 f ow a i 0 10 Switching Time for Motor Linmount Accel time 0 00 Depends on the setting of FO7 0 01 to 3600 Motor Mount Linmount Switching Level Oto 100 Switching Motor Mount 0 0 Disable 0 1 Unmeaunt Dead band 0 1 to 50 0 E a i i CECETCEE J code continued Code J43 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 J51 J52 PID Control Startup Frequency Signal Assignment to For relay output card Y1A B C Y2A B C Y3A B C Cumulative Run Time of Motor Motor 0 Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor 3 Motor 4 Data setting range 0 Disable 1 to 120 999 Depends on the setting of J36 Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1A
182. f the motor count of times when the run command for the inverter was turned ON When the total time exceeds 65 535 hours the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again T Shows the input watt hours of the inverter Upon exceeding 1 000 000 pul WaT TOUP Motet kWh the count goes back to 0 Shows the input watt hour data as input watt hour kWh x function Input watt hour data code E51 The range of display is 0 001 to 9 999 Values exceeding 9 999 are expressed as 9 999 Shows the cumulative count of RS 485 communications card Count of RS 485 1 errors NRR4 standard errors since first power ON RS 485 1 error content Note 2 Shows the latest error that has occurred with RS 485 communications standard in a code Count of RS 485 2 errors Shows the cumulative count of RS 485 communications card option NRR2 errors since first power ON RS 485 2 error content Note 2 Shows the latest error that has occurred with RS 485 communications option in a code Shows the cumulative count of errors detected during optional Count of option errors SA mots communication with option installed Shows the latest error that has been detected during optional Option error code ENEE communication in a code Count of start ups MAIN ROM version of the inverter Shows the ROM version of the inverter in 4 digits KP ROM version of the keypad Shows the ROM version of the keypad in 4 digits ROM version of the option Shows the ROM versi
183. frequency command has been entered with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Set the value of the frequency command to the same or higher than that of the starting or stop frequency F23 or F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the frequency command signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command generator Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings e g cancel the higher priority run command Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter high and F16 Frequency limiter low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones 6 2 Possible Causes 9 The coast to stop command was effective 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor 11 Overload 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient 13 Miss weak connection of the DC reactor DCR What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes E01 E02 E03 E04 E05 E98 and E99 and the input signal status with Menu
184. function codes Monitoring of running status Monitoring of various statuses Occurrence of an alarm Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes 3 4 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode you can 1 Run or stop the motor 2 Set the frequency command and others 3 Monitor the running status e g output frequency output current 3 3 1 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the wd key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the ro key decelerates the motor to stop The ev key is disabled You can run or stop the motor using the keypad only in Running mode and Programming mode To run the motor in reverse direction or to run the motor in reversible mode change the setting of function code F02 For details of function code F02 refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Chapter 5 Mole _ Forward Reverse Figure 3 2 Rotational Direction of Motor Note The rotational direction of IEC compliant motor is opposite to the one shown here E Display of running status on LCD monitor 1 When function code E45 LCD Monitor optional is set to 0 the LCD Monitor displays the running status the rotational direction and the operation guide The indicators above the LCD Monitor indicate the unit of the number displayed on the LED Monitor the indicators underne
185. g replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 2 Ground faults occurred at Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals U V and W the inverter output and perform a Megger test terminals gt Remove the part that short circuited including replacement of the wires relay terminals and motor 3 Loads were too heavy Measure the motor current with a measuring device and to trace the current trend Therefore use this information to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt f the load is too heavy decrease it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load variation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 6 8 Possible Causes 4 5 The value set for torque boost F09 was too large F37 0 1 3 or 4 The acceleration deceleration time was too short Malfunction caused by noise What to Check and Suggested Measures Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not come to stall if you set a lower value than the current one for F09 gt Lower the value for torque boost F09 if the motor is not going to stall Check that the motor generates enough torque required during acceleration deceleration That torque is calculated from the moment of
186. gh intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Improve noise control 6 15 18 amp Option card communications error Problem Possible Causes 1 There was a problem with 19 amp 5 Option card error the connection between the bus option card and the inverter There was a high intensity noise from outside A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the connector on the bus option card is properly mating with the connector of the inverter Reload the bus option card into the inverter Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable Reinforce noise control measures An error detected by the option card Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details 20 amp amp Incorrect operation error Problem Possible Causes 1 The io key was pressed 2 when H96 1 or 3 The start check function was activated when H96 2 or 3 The forced stop digital input STOP was turned ON You incorrectly operated the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures
187. gure 3 5 given below For further details on how to set operation commands and frequencies in Remote and Local modes refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC especially Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator block diagram E ON Local Mode LOC OFF Remote Mode LOC OFF LOC ON Local Mode LOC ON LOC OFF Figure 3 5 Transition between Remote and Local Modes 3 7 3 3 2 Setting up the frequency and PID process commands You can set up the desired frequency command and PID process command by using Q and V keys on the keypad You can also view and set up the frequency command as load shaft speed by setting function code E48 E Setting the frequency command Using amp and V keys factory default 1 Set function code F01 to 0 Keypad operation This cannot be done when the keypad is in Programming mode or Alarm mode To enable frequency setting by using N and V keys first move the keypad in Running mode 2 Pressing the O V key causes the frequency command to be displayed on the LCD Monitor with the lowermost digit blinking r min m min kW X10 min sec PID Yy Yy Means the keypad lt D I G S E T H Z gt takes precedence A N D O 00 60 OO FYD STORE 4 A A 4 A A FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND Figure 3 6 Setting the Frequency Command in Local Mode 3 If you need to change the f
188. h priority over F02 Remote Local switching Communications link Run forward command 2 FWD2 and Run reverse command 2 REV2 For details refer to the block diagram in the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 Section 4 3 Drive Command Generator 5 24 FO3 The table below shows relationship between keying and run commands in running per a keypad F02 0 rotation direction is defined by the digital inputs Results le PON o o o oF so oor o o or puntowara Poof or or oo ow se Poon f o or o on sw oo O O O O S e o o o or oF so o on o o o sop o on o or o Runrevose o o o o ow se The table below shows relationship between keying and setting F02 Run forward Chote e Digital input commands FWD and REV are valid for specifying the motor rotation direction and the commands FWD2 and REV2 are invalid e If you have assigned the FWD or REV function to the FWD or REV terminal you cannot change the setting of function code F02 while the terminals FWD and or REV are on e Make sure that terminals FWD and REV are off before changing the FWD or REV function from the function other than the FWD and REV functions to FWD or REV function Because if under this condition you assign the FWD or REV function to the FWD or REV terminal while the terminals FWD and or REV are on the motor would start running When Local is select
189. hanged from their factory defaults Drive Monitoring ee running information required for maintenance or ce I O VO Checking Displays external interface information Maintenance Information Displays maintenance information including cumulative run time i Displays four latest alarm codes Also allows you to view the Alarm Information i i i 3 4 7 information on the running status at the time the alarm occurred Data Copying Allows you to read or write function code data as well as to 348 verify it Load Factor Allows you to measure the maximum output current average Measurement output current and average braking power User Setting Allows you to add or delete function codes covered by Quick a Setup Communication Allows you to confirm the data of the function codes for Debugging communication S M W X and Z codes Note The function codes for optional features o code are displayed only when they are installed For details refer to their instruction manuals Figure 3 9 shows the transitions between menus in Programming mode Power ON Menu _ QUICK SET Scope of display on LCD prc DATA SET DATA CHECK To select the menu Figg want OPR MNTR ola pointer E i with key I O CHECK MAINTENANC Ore ALM INF ALM CAUSE DATA COPY LOAD FCTR USER SET COMM DEBUG oo s4 0 mf M f oS Figure 3 9 Menu Transition in Programming Mode When there has been no key operation for about 5 mi
190. he cause includes incorrect usage or inappropriate repair or modification 2 The product is used outside the standard specified range 3 The failure is caused by dropping damage or breakage during transportation after the purchase 4 The cause is earthquake fire storm or flood lightening excessive voltage or other types of disaster or secondary disasters Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 208V OO OOOOOODER T E E a E A nn al ee reele ela a laee e s eee e Three phase 200 to 220V 50Hz Three phase 200 to 230V 60Hz Output ratings Main power supply Three phase 200 to 240V 50 60Hz Aian contral Single phase 200 to 240V 50 60Hz Single phase 200 to 230V 50 60Hz power input 7 Single phase 200 to 220V 50Hz power input Single phase 200 to 230V 60Hz Voltage frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Voltage unbalance 2 or less 9 Frequency 5 to 5 1292s fie see re fatra E E e De z z amp DC injection braking DC injection DC injection braking Starting frequency 0 0 to 60 0Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0s Braking level 0 to 60 Applicable safety standards UL508C C22 2 No 14 EN50178 1997 Enclosure IEC60529 IP20 UL open type IPOO UL open type RA RA 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 8 6 0 6 9 9 7 9 7 11 5 23 33 34 41 41 120 Standard 4 pole motor 2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage a
191. he models of 208 V 50HP or above for 460 V 75HP or above Refer to page 2 18 DC link bus terminals P and N Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T Auxiliary power input terminals for the control circuit RO and TO Auxiliary power input terminals for the fans R1 and T1 For models of 208 V SOHP or above for 460 V 75HP or above Refer to page 2 22 Perform wiring as necessary Molded Case Circuit Breaker or Residual current ihe SAs 4 Setup internally For 208 V 50HP or above for 460 Y fSHP or above Device RCDV l Ground Fault Circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection Other Inverters Magnetic Contactor Figure 2 12 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment 2 16 Grounding terminals G Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction The inverter is designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 2 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as possible Main circuit power terminals L1 R L2 S L3 T 4 Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded case circuit breaker or ground leakage circuit breaker for circuit protection Phase sequence match
192. hen the total count exceeds 65 535 the display will be reset to 0 and the count will start again EDC DC link circuit voltage Shows the DC link circuit voltage of the inverter s main circuit TMPI Temperature nelee De Shows the temperature inside the inverter inverter TMPF ie sono of Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink Input signal status at ON OFF status of input signals of the terminals terminal block of FWD REV X1 to X5 Highlighted when short circuited normal when control circuit open Terminal input signal ON OFF status of input signals for function code S06 Communication status under FWD REV X1 to X5 XF XR RST Highlighted when 1 normal communication control when o Output signal Output signals to the terminals Y1 to Y3 Y5 SOABC Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 lappi l 1 Sverlapping alarm is displayed if no alarms have occurred oaen Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 De ere is displayed if no alarms have occurred SUB Secondary error code for the alarm CNote When the same alarm occurs a number of times in succession reoccurring alarm the alarm SA F i information for the first occurrence is retained and the information for the subsequent occurrences is discarded Only the number of consecutive occurrences will be updated 3 26 Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically
193. iable torque load for high starting torque 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation variable torque load in acceleration deceleration 4 Auto energy saving operation variable torque load for high starting torque for acceleration deceleration 5 Auto energy saving operation auto torque boost in acceleration deceleration Starting torque 50 or over Start stop Keypad ve G Start and stop with or and cr keys External signals 7 digital inputs Forward reverse rotation stop command capable of 3 wire operation second operation command coast to stop command external alarm alarm reset etc Link operation Operation through RS 485 communication and Field Bus communication option Operation command switch Remote local switch link switch second operation command switch Control Hin commana Keypad operation Can be set with Q key External potentiometer 1 to 5 kQ 1 2 W Prepared by users Connected to analog input terminals 13 12 11 Analog input Can be set with external voltage current input E g 0 to 5 VDC 11 to 5 VDC is applicable with bias gain for analog input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 5 VDC 0 to 100 terminal 12 V2 4 to 20mA DC O to 100 terminal C1 Multistep frequency Selectable from 8 steps step 0 to 7 UP DOWN operation The frequency rises or lowers while the digital input signal is turned on Link operation Can be set with RS 485 commu
194. ide overlapping alarm RESET RESET Operation guide 7 Figure 3 31 With Overlapping Alarm If there is an overlapping alarm you can view more detailed information by pressing the O key In the examples below 2 Er6 corresponds to the first overlapping occurrence and 3 Er6 to the second overlapping occurrence E Display of alarm history In addition to the most recent current alarm you can view three recent alarms and any overlapping alarms by pressing the N vV key while the most recent one is being displayed 2 0H2 1 Overlapping alarm No of consecutive occurrences KEYPD COM ERR Cause of alarm PRGSPRG MENU Operation guide RESETSRESET Operation guide 1 Er Oo Most recent alarm No of consecutive occurrences KEYPD COM ERR Cause of alarm is added if there is an PRGSPRG MENU Operation guide overlapping alarm RESETS RESET Operation guide 1 Er6 3 Previous alarm No of consecutive occurrences KEYPD COM ERR Cause of alarm PRGSPRG MENU Operation guide RESETSRESET Operation guide Y Figure 3 32 Switching of Display of Overlapping Alarm History 3 43 E Display of running status information at the time of alarm By pressing the key while an alarm code is displayed you can view the output frequency output current and other data concerning the running status The data you can view is the same as with 6 ALM INF Use Q and Q keys for scrolling pages within the menu Pressing the frg key or the
195. ideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor the electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board and the cooling fan are approaching their service life 1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with that at factory shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment anna nena nnn nnn nnn n anna nana nnnnannnnannnnnnan Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e Disconnect power wires for the auxiliary input to the control circuit RO TO e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X5 of the control Circuit e Ifapotentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e fan external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that transistor output signals Y1 Y3 and relay output signals Y5A C
196. ied by function code E43 is displayed In Running Mode press the oS key to switch between monitor items The item being monitored shifts as you press the SS key in the sequence shown in Table 3 6 Table 3 6 Items Monitored Page to be Monitored Item Example Unit Meaning of Displayed Value selected Function Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed Frequency actually being output Hz eae 120 iLi rimin Output frequency x Output frequency Hz x E50 cine 5 Output frequency SLi ________________ x 100 Maximum frequency Output current es A Output of the inverter in current in rms Input Power ae Input power to the inverter Motor output torque in Calculated value a Output voltage V Output of the inverter in voltage in rms 4 Calculated torque Sty Motor output Motor output in kW Tae Road factor oo o Load rate of ne motor in with the rated output 45 being at 100 PID process command ayer PID process command feedback value transformed 10 Note 1 tad to that of physical value of the object to be controlled PID feedback value ann 12 Note 1 ek Refer to the function codes E40 and E41 for details 6 PID output in with the maximum output 14 frequency F03 being at 100 Analog input to the inverter converted per E40 and E41 17 Refer to the function codes E40 and E41 for details kW X10 min sec PID Yy Vo A W o W o o PID output Note 1 LLL Analog input monitor 290
197. ify operation has completed successfully To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Figure 3 22 Menu Transition for VERIFY 3 35 Error screens ERROR DATAT INV DATA2 DATAS PLL ERROR DATAI INV DATA2 DATAS Druri a RES ERROR Ver DATAI INV DATAZ If you press re key during Verify operation the operation under way will be aborted and this Error screen will appear Note If the keypad does not have any valid data this Error screen will appear Note The function code data held in the keypad is incompatible with that in the inverter Either data may be non standard or a version upgrade performed in the past may have made the keypad or the inverter incompatible Contact your Fuji Electric representative Figure 3 22 Menu Transition for VERIFY continued Note If an ERROR screen or an ERROR Ver Screen appears during operation press the eset key to reset the error factor When Reset is complete the screen will go back to List of data copy operations 3 36 5 Check operation KP INV READ KP INV WRITE KPINY VERIFY KPDATA CHECK DATA COP YRRSM KPDATA CHECK fo 75F1is 2 2 3 Z 5F18 4 FEET AV gt FAESA AV Figure 3 23 Error screen we ala RES List of data copy operations Select desired operation by moving the cursor with Ww V key Press key to finalize desired operation Data selection screen Select data to be chec
198. ight different frequency commands defined beforehand by seven function codes C05 to C11 Multistep frequency 1 to 7 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 8 different preset speeds The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 and SS4 In the Selected frequency column Other than multistep frequency represents the reference frequency commanded by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others Terminal X3 Terminal X2 Terminal X1 Function code E03 Function code E02 Function code E01 Selected frequency ee Ce ono FONT crt iste raven 7 E Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire operation Turning HLD ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output frequency FWD REV 3 HUD E Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning BX ON will immediately stop and the motor will enter the coast to a stop operation without issuing any alarms 5 47 E Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases
199. inals Output Current gt gt gt po I m Q an 1D 5 59 E51 E65 Command Loss Detected Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ in a part of maintenance information on the keypad The input watt hour data will be displayed as follows E51 Coefficient for input watt hour data x Input watt hour kWh Note Setting E51 data to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous display coefficient otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated For the procedure for viewing maintenance information refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE MULTI FUNCTION KEYPAD Command Loss Detection Level When the analog frequency command by frequency setting through terminals 12 C1 and V2 has dropped below 10 of the expected frequency command within 400 ms the inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference frequency When the frequency command level in voltage or current returns to a level higher than that specified by E65 the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and continues to run following the frequency command Frequency Command by Analog Input REF OFF i Preset
200. ing is unnecessary To insure safety a magnetic contactor should be used to disconnect the drive from the power supply when the drive protective function activates Use control circuit terminal FWD REV or the RUN STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the drive The main circuit power should be used to start or stop the drive only if absolutely necessary and then should not be used more than once every hour If you need to connect these terminals to a single phase power supply please contact the factory Drive output terminals U V W Connect these terminals to a 3 phase motor in the correct phase sequence If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect exchange any two of the U V and W phases Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the drive output If the cable from the drive to the motor is very long a high frequency current may be generated by stray capacitance between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the drive an increase in leakage current or a reduction in current indication precision When a motor is driven by a PWM type drive the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated by drive element switching If the motor cable with 460V series motors in particular is particularly long surge voltage will deteriorate motor insulation To prevent this use the following guidelines Drives 7 5 HP and larger Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V 460 VAC
201. into close contact with the inverter install a surge absorber in parallel To put the inverter on standby by making the control circuit only active with the main circuit power supply being opened connect this pair of wires to terminals R0 and T0 Without connecting this pair of wires to these terminals you can still run the inverter as long as the main wires of the commercial power supply to the main circuit are properly connected 8 10 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Normally no need to be connected Use these terminals when the inverter is equipped with a high power factor PWM converter with a regenerative facility You can select the frequency command source either electronically by supplying a DC voltage signal within the range of 0 to 10 V 0 to 5 V or 1 to 5 V between terminals 12 and 11 or manually by connecting a frequency command potentiometer to terminals 13 12 and 11 For the wiring of the control circuit use shielded or twisted wires When using shielded wires connect the shields to earth To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wires as far away as possible from the main circuit wires recommended distance 10 cm or longer and never put them in the same wire duct Where a control circuit wire needs to cross a main circuit wire route them so that they meet at right angles 8 11 8 5 External Dimensions 8 5 1 Standard models Unit inch mm 6 42 163 4 00 101 5 _ 2 42 61 5
202. ion speed 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps RS 485 Communication Standard Station address Data length Parity check Stop bits No response error 0 No detection 1 to 60 Rak detection time Response latency time 0 00 to 1 00 CIRE Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol FRENIC Loader protocol SX protocol Metasys N2 FLNP1 5 20 y code continued F Incre RS 485 Communication 1 to 255 Option Station add fied gt Immediately trip and alarm ErP Trip and alarm after running for the period specified by timer y13 via yi4 yi5 yi6 yi y1 y19 y20 T Change when running Communications error iil Retry during the period specified by timer y13 If retry fails trip and alarm If it succeeds continue to run Continue to run Error processing timer 0 0 to 60 0 Transmission speed 0 2400 bps 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps ail IT ace Data length 0 amp bits 1 7 bits Parity check 0 None 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stop bits 2 bits Ai No response error 0 No detection Y detection time 1 to 60 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y 3 Metasys N2 4 FLNP1 Bus Link Function _ Frequency command Runcommand Mode selection 9 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Follow H30 data Via field bus z par
203. ions press eset key Menu Transition for WRITE 3 33 Error screens ERROR DATA IDATA2Z gt INV DATAS LI ERROR DATAT DATAZ23INV DATAS DATA COPY ERROR Ver DATAT DATA2Z INV DATAS If you press rs eset key during Write operation the operation under way will be aborted and this Error screen will appear Note Updating of the function code data in the inverter is incomplete with some of it remaining old Do not run the inverter in this state Before running the inverter redo the writing or perform initialization For safety considerations the following situations are treated as an error e No valid data is found in the keypad s memory No Read operation has been performed since factory shipment or a Read operation has been cancelled or aborted e The data held in the keypad s memory has an error e There is a mismatch in inverter s model number e A Write operation has been performed while the inverter is running e The inverter is data protected e The Write enable for keypad command WE KP is OFF The function code data held in the keypad is incompatible with that in the inverter Either data may be non standard or a version upgrade performed in the past may have made the keypad or the inverter incompatible Contact your Fuji Electric ewe ween RES representative Figure 3 21 Menu Transition for WRITE continued Note If an ERROR screen or an ERROR Ver Screen appear
204. ions given for P99 3 HO3 Data Initializing Initialize the motor parameters HO3 2 4 P03 Motor Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set Rated current data differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor e Upon completion of the initialization the data of function code HO3 is reset to 0 default setting e If a capacity other than that of applicable motor rating is set at P02 the capacity will be internally converted to the applicable motor rating see the table on the following pages 5 63 H04 H05 Auto resetting Times Auto resetting Reset interval While the auto resetting feature is specified even if the protective function subject to retry is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state the inverter will automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults If the protection function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried LED monitor LED monitor Alarm status Alarm status displays displays Instantaneous overcurrent ee ee M h aoe E Number of resetting times H04 H04 specifies the number of auto resetting retry times for automatically escaping the tripped state If the protective function is activated more than th
205. is not displayed 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed ifan alarm code appears on the LED monitor Goto Section 6 3 if an abnormal pattern appears on the LED monitor _ _ amp Goto Section 6 4 while no alarm code is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Motor is running abnormally 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter 2 No forward reverse operation command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation 3 No indication of rotation direction keypad operation 4 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode 5 Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped 6 The frequency command was set below the starting or stop frequency 7 Afrequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active 8 The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor gt
206. issipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run 4 Solving abnormal vibration after installation If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration to the cooling fan s or the keypad fix them firmly using the fixing screws provided as accessories E Fixing the cooling fan s Table 2 4 Fixing Screws Power Nominal Tightening Screw size supply applied motor Inverter type torque Refer to accessory voltage FRNOO7F1S 2U FRNO10F1S 2U M4x35 4 pcs Figure A FRNO15F1S 2U FRNO20F1S 2U FRNO25F1S 2U M4x50 2 pcs Figure B FRNO30F1S 2U FRNO10F1S 4U FRNO15F1S 4U M4x35 4 pcs Figure A FRNO20F1S 4U FRNO25F1S 4U FRNO30F1S 4U M4x50 2 pcs 0 5 Figure B FRNO40F1S 4U Figure A Figure B Figure 2 4 Fixing the Cooling Fan s 2 5 E Fixing the keypad for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below A Remove the terminal block TB cover and the front cover For the procedure refer to 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover 2 To fix the front cover and keypad hold the front cover and the keypad together and tighten the two attached screws provided as accessories from the back of the keypad Keypad fastening screws M3 x 12 Attached to inverter NY Backside of front cover Tightening torque 6 2Ib in 0 7 N m Figure 2 5 Fixing Multi function Keypad 2
207. jump hysteresis width 0 to 30 Hz can be set Restart after momentary The inverter restarts upon recovery from power failure without stopping the motor In the operation continuation mode recovery of the power supply is waited for while the Ppa worn aes slightly drops can be made ponies geleg at 0 Hz starting at the frequency immediately before the momentary power failure and starting at the frequency specified in the starting mode after power recovery Keeps the current under the preset value during operation Line inverter switching OAS Swe iis starting at line frequency can be made with a digital input signal A built in line inverter switching sequence performs sequence control with a digital input signal ISW50 ISW60 to output a signal SW88 SW52 1 SW52 2 for controlling an external magnetic contactor MC As a built in sequence two types can be selected including the one switching automatically to the line upon an inverter alarm control Process commands Key operation UP and DOWN keys 0 to 100 Analog input terminal 12 V2 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Analog input terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 UP DOWN digital input 0 to 100 Communication RS 485 Bus option 0 to 20 000 0 to 100 Peqdack value Analog input terminal 12 V2 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Analog input terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 PID Alarm output absolute value alarm deviation alarm No
208. ked by moving the cursor with N Q key To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Press key to finalize desired data Check data screen Displays function codes and their data To check other function codes press N V key To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Menu Transition for DATA CHECK If no valid data is found in the keypad this Error screen will appear Note Figure 3 24 Error Screen for DATA COPY Note If an ERROR screen appears during operation press the eset key to reset the error factor When Reset is complete the screen will go back to List of data copy operations 3 37 3 4 10 Measuring load factor 9 LOAD FCTR Menu 9 LOAD FCTR in Programming Mode allows you to measure the maximum output current the average output current and the average braking power There are two modes of measurement hours in which the measurement takes place for a specified length of time and start to stop in which the measurement takes place from the start of running to the stop Note If the start to stop mode is entered while the inverter is running the measurement takes place until it is stopped If the start to stop mode is entered while the inverter is stopped the measurement will take place from the next start of running until it is stopped Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode p
209. l mode In remote mode which applies to normal operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data settings held in it whereas in local mode which applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the system and is driven manually under the control of the keypad Remote mode The sources for setting run and frequency commands is determined by various setting means switching signals such as function codes switching of run command 1 2 and link priority function Local mode The sources for setting run and frequency commands is the keypad regardless of the settings specified by function codes The keypad takes precedence over the setting means specified by the run command 1 2 or the link priority function What follows shows the setting means of run command using the keypad in the local operation mode 3 6 Table 3 3 Run Commands from the Keypad in the Local Operation Mode If function code F02 is set Setting means of the run command to 0 Keypad You can run stop the motor using the ws ev 0 key on the keypad 1 External signal 2 Keypad forward You can run stop the motor using the 0 0 key on the keypad You can run the motor in forward direction only The O key has been disabled 3 Keypad reverse You can run stop the motor using the ev amp 0 key on the keypad You can run the motor in reverse direction only The ews key has been disabled The source for setting run and frequenc
210. le is large raise the inverter capacity Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power FRENIC Eco cannot be driven by single phase power source CNote You can disable input phase loss protection using the function code H98 6 Problem IICN Li Output phase loss Possible Causes 1 2 7 amp Heat sink overheat Problem Inverter output wires are broken Wires for motor winding are broken The terminal screws for inverter output were not tight enough A single phase motor has been connected Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications 2 Air vent is blocked 3 Accumulated running time of the cooling fan exceeded the standard period for replacement or the cooling fan malfunctioned 4 Load was too heavy Output phase loss occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires Measure the output current gt Replace the motor Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Eco only drives three phase induction motors Temperature around heat sink rose What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the
211. ling reverse motor speed 4 Enable Follow Run command both forward and reverse 5 Enable Follow Run command inversely both forward and reverse p H11 Deceleration Mode 5 Normal deceleration Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous 2 Disable Overcurrent Limiting Enable H13 Restart Mode after 0 1 to 10 0 Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Set deceleration time 0 01 to 100 00 999 Follow the current limit command H15 Continuous running level 208V 200 to 300 460V 400 to 600 H16 Allowable 0 0 to 30 0 momentary power 999 The longest time automatically determined by the failure time p amp Referto 5 34 p H17 Select Starting 0 0 to 120 0 Characteristics 999 Harmonize at the maximum frequency Frequency for idling H26 Disable Enable Upon detection of PTC the inverter aiani trips and stops with 244 displayed Enable Upon detection of PTC the inverter continues running while outputting alarm signal THM H27 Level aN so 5 14 H code continued Change Refer Code Name Data setting range i when Data Default H30 Communications Link Frequency command Run command Function Lo Foveso F02 Mode selection 4 RS 485 link F02 F01C30 RS 485 link RS 465 link RS 485 link RS 485 link Option F02 RS 485 link Option RS 485 link FOVWIC30 RS 485 link Option RS 465 link RS
212. ll load 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit include harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use meters indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculate in the following formula m Three phase input Electric power W Power factor _ x 100 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit c DC link bus Input primary side Output secondary side voltage E P N z Voltage Current Voltage Current a A D i A gt fo ha 4 O Ss Ow o g Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter 5 AR As AT VR Vs VT WR WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww V Z Rectifier or moving iron type Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC power meter power meter power meter power meter Moving iron type Moving coil type Type of meter Symbol of meter C Note It is not recommended that meters
213. loss if any Output phase loss Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running and during running stopping the inverter output protection Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink temperature in case protection of cooling fan failure or overload Detects a failure of the internal air circulation DC fan and alarm stops the inverter For models of 50HP or above in 208 V 75HP or above in 460 V Stops the inverter output upon detecting an excessively high ambient temperature LiH7 inside the inverter caused by a failure or an overload condition of the cooling fan Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor IGBT internal protection temperature calculated from the output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over the preset value External Places the inverter in alarm stop state upon receiving digital input signal THR LiT alarm input 1 This alarm on 30A B C should be ignored depending upon the function code setting 8 17 Alarm output 30A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Name Blown fuse Abnormal condition in charger circuit Electronic thermal overload PTC thermistor Motor protection Overload early warning Stall prevention Alarm relay output for any fault Memory error detection Keypad communi cations error detection CPU error detection
214. low 3 phase 208 V or 350HP or below 3 phase 460 V During running at constant speed Upon detection of zero phase current in the output power this E function stops the inverter output to protect the inverter from overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit Applicable to inverters of 125HP for 208V and 125HP for 460V or above 3 phase 208 V or 450HP or above 3 phase 460 V TUHI I Overvoltage LILI I protection The inverter stops the inverter output upon detection of an overvoltage condition 400 VDC for 3 phase 208V 800 VDC for 3 phase 460V in the DC link bus This protection is not assured if extremely large AC line voltage is applied inadvertently During acceleration TU 11 LILIL During deceleration TU 1 During running at iz constant speed Stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops below the protection undervoltage level 200 VDC for 3 phase 208V 400 VDC for 3 phase 460 V However if data 3 4 or 5 is selected for F14 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This function prevents the loss inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or protection inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function will not detect input phase
215. ly in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems Auxiliary power input terminals RO and TO for the control circuit In general the inverter will run normally without power supplied to the auxiliary power input for the control circuit However if you share the input power for the control circuit with that for the main circuit you would be lost when in the event of an error or alarm you turn OFF the magnetic contactor between the inverter and the commercial power supply If the magnetic contactor is turned OFF the input power to the control circuit is shut OFF causing the alarm signals 30A B C to be lost and the display on the keypad to disappear To secure input power to the control circuit at all times supply the power from the primary side of the magnetic contactor to control power auxiliary input terminals RO and TO When introducing a _ residual current operated protective device RCD ground fault circuit Note interrupter GFCI connect its output secondary side to terminals RO and TO Connecting its input primary side to those terminals causes the RCD GFCI to malfunction since the input power voltage to the inverter is three phase but the one to terminals RO and TO is single phase To avoid such problems be sure to insert an insulation transformer or auxiliary B contacts of a magnetic contactor in the location shown in Figure 2 17
216. me of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run The display is in units of 1000 hours The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 7 4 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at one of the transistor output terminals Y1 to Y3 and the relay contact terminals Y5A Y5C and 30A B C as soon as any of the conditions listed under the Judgment level column has been exceeded The early warning signal is also turned ON when a lock condition on the internal air circulation DC fan on 208V inverters with a capacity of 50HP or above on 460V inverters with a capacity of 75HP or above has been detected Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting Electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time Cooling fan Accumulated run time gt 61000 hours 5HP for 208V and 7HP for 460V or below Accumulated run time gt 40000 hours 7 5HP for 208V and 10HP for 460V Accumulated run time gt 25000 hours 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F under 80 of fu
217. mmand ON activates the DC braking As long as this command remains ON the DC braking is working regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Furthermore turning this command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque Note For details refer to the description of F20 to F22 5 48 E Enable write from keypad WE KP Function code data 19 Turning this terminal command OFF disables changing of function code data from the keypad Only when this command is ON you can change function code data from the keypad according to the setting of function code FOO as listed below Disable editing of all function code data except that of FOO oe Enable editing of all function code data Inhibit editing of all function code data except that of FOO If the WE KP command is not assigned to any terminal the inverter will interpret WE KP to be always ON by default If you mistakenly assign a WE KP command to a terminal you cannot edit or modify function code data anymore In such a case temporarily turn on the WE KP assigned terminal and then reassign the WE KP command to a correct terminal Cote E Switch normal inverse operation IVS Function code data 21 This terminal command switches the output frequency control between normal proportional to
218. motor is required select an inverter with a capacity one size greater than the standard Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current When transporting or storing inverters follow the procedures and select locations that meet the environmental conditions listed in Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment xii How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring instructions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 OPERATION This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are describe
219. munication error is detected between the keypad and the inverter this Error screen will appear Figure 3 20 Menu Transition for READ Note f an ERROR screen or an ERROR Ver Screen appears during operation press the eset key to reset the error condition When Reset is complete the screen will go back to List of data copy operations 3 32 3 Write operation KP INV READ KPI INV WRITE KP INV VERIFY KPDATA CHECK JSN AV gt TP INV WRITE bo 75F18S 2 WRITE DATA1 DATA2739 INV DATAS oy wae SeA F D WRITING DATA1 DATA2 gt INV DATAS oom WRITING END DATA DATA2 gt 1NV DATAS JU RES Figure 3 21 List of data copy operations Select desired operation by moving the cursor with Q Q key Press key to finalize desired operation Data selection screen Select desired data by moving the cursor with N Y key To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Press key to finalize desired data Confirmation screen If Write is actually performed the selected data will overwrite the data held in the inverter If OK press key To go back to Data selection screen press eset key Press key to start Write operation In progress screen A bar indicating progress appears in the bottom Upon completion Completion screen automatically appears Completion screen Indicates that Write operation has completed successfully To go back to List of data copy operat
220. n 1 4 Storage Environment and Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Environment Protection 8 4 Terminal Specifications 8 4 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 and Section 2 3 7 Table 2 10 respectively 8 4 2 Running the inverter with keypad Power supply Peradi A eo Three phase x 200 to 240 V XE 50 60 Hz or three phase ae 380 to 480 V Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 DCR Note 1 G Note 2 MCCB or Note 3 GFCI MC 50 60 Hz iiij B inis i mond for control circuits Note 4 Aux power input for AC fans Grounding terminal Control circuit Grounding terminal Alarm relay output J for any fault Relay output Analog inputs Analog output md o I rt E HIO A R DCR DC Reactor J x GFCI Ground Fault Circuit 2 a interrupter gt MC Magnetic Contactor z 2 MCCB Molded Case S Circuit Breaker Q 3 TE 2 w i When connecting a DC reactor DCR first remove the short bar between terminals P1 and P A DCR is optional for inverters below 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V but standard for inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above For inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above be sure to connect a DCR To protect wiring insert a molded case circuit br
221. n codes y01 to y10 because their data is ignored 8 3 Common Specifications a a Maximum frequency 25 to 120 Hz ee O Base reguero pmo nmei aeo i 6 0 75t0 eloon resni 30HP to 100HP for 208V and 40HP to cil for 460V may Oe 0 75 to 6 kHz 208 V 460 V 125HP for 208V and 125 to 900HP for 460V omer son EA ambient temperature or output current to tect the inverter is protective operation can be canceled by function code H98 Accuracy Analog setting 0 2 of maximum frequency at 25 10 C 77250 F Keypad setting 0 01 of maximum frequency at 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F n resolution Analog setting 1 1000 of maximum frequency ex 0 06 Hz at 60 Hz 0 12 Hz at 120 Hz Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 Hz or more Link setting Selectable from 2 types 1 20000 of maximum frequency ex 0 003 Hz at 60 Hz 0 006 Hz at 120 Hz 0 01 Hz fixed Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output frequency Three phase 208 V common spec AVR control can be turned ON or OFF The phase 460 V Og re ee ee ee ere 8 a 1 point Arbitrary voltage and frequency can be set Three phase 208 V 0 to 240 V 0 to 120 Hz Th 460 V ree phase 0 to 500 V 0 to 120 Hz Torque boost can be set with the function code F09 Set when 0 1 3 or 4 is selected at F37 ee eee eee eee Select application load type with the function code F37 0 Variable torque load 1 Var
222. n time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc Time 1 Dec Time 1 F07 Maximum F08 Frequency F03 S a e cms i Stop Frequency Frequency Ae a F25 F23 A Actual Actual Acc Time Dec Time Cote e If you choose S curve acceleration deceleration or curvilinear acceleration deceleration in Acceleration Deceleration Pattern HO7 the actual acceleration deceleration times are longer than the specified times Refer to the descriptions of HO7 for details e If you specify an improperly long acceleration deceleration time the current limiting function or the automatic deceleration function regenerative bypass function may be activated resulting in an actual acceleration deceleration time longer than the specified one Torque Boost Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 specifies V f pattern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load FO9 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Variable General purpose fans and specified by FO9 Pumps require high Constant torquetoad Autoorque salut A boosi over excited at no load F09 Pumps require high start torque Pumps require high st
223. n x 83 150 or above E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 Disable E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor The time constant is the time until the electronic thermal overload protection detects the motor overload while the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 has flown The thermal constants of most general purpose motors including Fuji motors are set at about 5 minutes for capacities of 25HP for 208V 30HP for 460V or below or about 10 minutes for capacities of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or above by factory default Example When function code F12 is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm Tu condition alarm code i when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of
224. nal Location Diagram FRN200F1S 4U Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 15 9lb in 1 8 N m Wire end terminal screw M4 Figure 10 8 Point A Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 31 0lb in 3 5 N m Screw M5 Cable tie Protective cap Figure 10 9 Point B 10 8 FRN250F1S 4U to FRN350F1S 4U 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below lo FEA AIT i all NTO DOTON T ISTAT RTAC N E O Ny ao T ARENGE PointtA 4 z Point B Pa Y x MAIDEN EOE ACUTE T HENES EENEN Figure 10 10 Internal Location Diagram FRN250F1S 4U to FRN350F1S 4U Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 15 9lb in 1 8 N m Wire end terminal Figure 10 11 PointA Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 31 0lb in 3 5 N m Screw M5 Pro
225. ncluding voltage current and input power as keypad well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode Equipped with a liquid crystal display LCD Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC Eco inverter to another Extension cable The extension cable connects the RS 485 communications port standard with a keypad or for remote an RS 485 USB converter keypad operation Three lengths are available 16 4ft 9 8ft and 3 3ft 5 m 3 m and 1 m RS 485 This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy Option Communications Card RS 485 USB A converter that allows connection of an RS 485 communications port to a USB port on a PC converter Inverter support Inverter support loader software Windows GUI Graphics User Interface based that makes loader software setting of function codes easy Options for Operation and Communications Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers Surge Asurge suppressor eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power suppressors supply lines Use of a surge suppressor is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded
226. nd and its operation the reference frequency and the motor drive power e g SS1 SS2 SS4 Hz2 Hz1 SW50 SW60 Hz PID IVS LE LOC and FR2 FR1 Be aware of that switching of any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result 5 45 0 1000 Sst 1002 SS4 9 Select multistep frequency SS2 Switch frequency command 2 1 13 Enablepc brake BRK 15 Switch to commercial power 50Hz S50 16 Switch to commercial power 60Hz sweo 19 1019 20 U DI Select local keypad operation Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power ISW50 50 Hz T e sequence to switch to commercial power ISW60 MEN1 Enable Pump Drive Motor 1 to 4 5 46 F Note Any negative logic Active off command cannot be assigned to the functions marked C with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON E Select multistep frequency 1 to 7 steps SS1 SS2 and SS4 Function code data 0 1 and 2 The combination of ON OFF states of digital input signals SS1 SS2 and SS4 selects one of e
227. nd charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above are unlit and that the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals is lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Disposal ACAUTION e Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur Others e Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Conformity with Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given below inverters marked with CE can be considered to be compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC ACAUTION Be sure to earth the grounding terminal G Use an earth wire sized more than that of the power wires used in the power dispatch system Do not use a residual current operated protective device RCD ora ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI as a sole mechanism of electric shock protection With overcurrent pro
228. nd routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Improve noise control Alternatively return the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the SS key and check that the alarm goes on gt This problem was caused by a problem of the printed circuit board PCB on which the CPU is mounted Contact your Fuji Electric representative 16 amp c Keypad communications error Problem A communications error occurred between the remote keypad and the inverter Possible Causes 1 Break in the communications cable or poor contact 2 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter 3 The keypad malfunctioned 17 amp 3 CPU error What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control For details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Check that alarm does not occur if you connect another keypad to the inverter gt Replace the keypad Problem A CPU error e g erratic CPU operation occurred Possible Causes 1 A hi
229. need to assign the Low output torque detected signal U TL data 45 to the general purpose output terminals Calculated Torque E p h 111 E80 5 The detection level is set so that 100 corresponds to the rated torque of the motor In the inverter s low frequency operation as a substantial error in torque calculation occurs no low torque can be detected within the operation range at less than 20 of the base frequency F04 In this case the result of recognition before entering this operation range is retained The U TL signal goes off when the inverter is stopped Since the motor parameters are used in the calculation of torque it is recommended that auto tuning be applied by function code P04 to achieve higher accuracy Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Filter time constant Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Filter time constant These function codes provide the filter time constants for the voltage and current of the analog input at terminals 12 C1 and V2 Choose appropriate values for the time constants considering the response speed of the mechanical system as large time constants slow down the response In case the input voltage fluctuates because of noise specify large time constants Motor No of poles P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor Enter the value shown on the nameplate of the motor This setting is used to
230. negative logic cannot be applied to the terminal function rat The negative logic for 59 Terminal C1 off signal is corresponded with the inverter ROM No F1811700 or more 5 54 E inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal is used to tell the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating inverter being stopped E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the allowable error zone prefixed to 2 5 Hz E Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by function code E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Detection level 1 Hz hysteresis band of frequency comparator prefixed at 1 Hz E Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON
231. nerally control signal wires are not enforced insulated If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In such a case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Otherwise an accident or electric shock could occur ACAUTION e Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Otherwise injuries could occur e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation A WARNING Be sure to install the terminal block cover and the front cover before turning the power ON Do not remove the covers while power is applied Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the retry function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an acceleration decelerati
232. nformation in this manual Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Fuji Electric Corp of America 2007 11 KO7 KO7 10CM P P
233. nformity with Low Voltage Directive ee 10 1 10 4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 10 2 AO ART General eare 2e dscsoadseseuitedeccententcuetcesecentect 10 2 10 4 2 Conformity with the harmonics regulation 10 2 10 5 Conformity with the EMC Directive in the EU 10 3 10 5 1 General sissies ee ceetece cetaceans 10 3 10 5 2 EMC compliant filter Option 10 3 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter cccceeeeeeeeeeees 10 5 10 5 4 EMC compliant environment and class 10 6 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check the following 1 An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package e Cooling fan fixing screws for inverters of 7 5 to 30HP for 208V and 10 to 40HP for 460V e Keypad fixing screws for inverters of 1 to 30HP for 208V and 1 to 40HP for 460V e Bush rubbers for cable guide plate for inverters of 1 to 25HP for 208V and 1 to 30HP for 460V Instruction manual this manual 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model you ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the following page For the inverter whose capacity is 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above its mass is print
234. ng and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Eco Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC Eco User s Manual e RS 485 Communication User s Manual e Catalog e Relay Output Card OPC F1 RY Instruction Manual e Mounting Adapter for External Cooling PB F1 Installation Manual e Panel mount Adapter MA F1 Installation Manual e FRENIC Loader Instruction Manual The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use E Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual A WARN N G Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to A CAUT O N dangerous conditions p
235. nications and field bus communications option Frequency setting change Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external sonal digital input Changeover between remote and local keypad operation or frequency setup through communication is also possible Auxiliary frequency setting Inputs at terminal 12 C1 or V2 can be added to the main Inverse operation The digital input ial and function code setting sets or switches between the normal and inverse operations 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Terminal 12 V2 20 to 4 mADC 0 to 100 Terminal C1 Acceleration i Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types Linear Geceleretion Sine S curve weak S curve strong Curve constant output max capacity Shutoff of the operation command coasts the motor to decelerate and stop 8 6 Item Explanation Remarks Frequency limiter High and low limiters can be set setting range 0 to 120 Hz Selection can be made _ hime between continuation of operation and stopping at frequencies equal to or smaller than the lower limit Bias frequency Bias of frequency and PID commands can be set in the range between 0 and 100 Gain for frequency The analog input gain can be set in the range from 0 to 200 Voltage signals terminal setting 12 V2 and current signal terminal C1 can be set independently Jump frequency setting 3 operation points and their common
236. not turn the circuit breaker ON and OFF quickly Turning ON the circuit breaker supplies power to the control circuit to the operation level lighting LEDs on the keypad in a short period Immediately turning it OFF even retains the control circuit power for a time while it shuts down the power to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor since the contactor is directly powered from the main power Under such conditions the control circuit can issue a turn on command to the magnetic contactor but the contactor not powered can produce nothing This state is regarded as abnormal causing an alarm 6 13 13 4 Electronic thermal overload relay Problem Possible Causes 1 The characteristics of electronic thermal did not match those of the motor overload 2 Activation level for the electronic thermal relay was inadequate 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Load was too heavy 14 LLL Overload Problem Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded that of inverter specifications 2 The torque boost setting F09 was too high 3 The acceleration deceleration time was too short 4 Load was too heavy 5 Air vent is blocked 6 The service life of the cooling fan has expired or the cooling fan malfunctioned 7 The wires to the motor are too long and caused a large amount of current to leak from them Ele
237. notes on the following pages 2 24 Table 2 10 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Symbol Name Functions 13 Potenti Power supply 10 VDC for the potentiometer that gives the frequency command ometer Potentiometer 1 to 5kQ Classifi cation power Allowable output current 10 mA supply 12 Voltage 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage input 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal mode operation 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback 3 Used as an additional auxiliary frequency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands Input impedance 22kQ The allowable maximum input voltage is 15 VDC If the input voltage is 10 VDC or more the inverter will interpret it as 10 VDC C1 Current 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input current input 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal mode operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse mode operation 2 Used for PID process command signal or its feedback 3 Used as an additional auxiliary frequency command to be added to one of various main frequency commands Input impedance 250Q The allowable maximum input current is 30 mA DC If the input current exceeds 20 mA DC the inverter will interpret it as 20 mA DC V2 Voltage 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input voltage
238. nsufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage at high frequencies to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power E Base Frequency F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If O is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the automatic torque boost settings automatic energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor E Non linear V f Pattern for Frequency H50 Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 disables the non linear V f pattern operation E Non linear V f Pattern for Voltage H51 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Note If the rated voltage at base frequency F05 is set to 0 settings of function codes H50 and H51 will be ignored If the auto torque boost F37 is enabled H50 and H51
239. nt 4 to 20 mA is output You can select either one of the output switching the slide switch SW4 on the control PCB Refer to Section 2 3 8 and changing data of the function code F29 You can select one of the following signal functions with function code F31 Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Analog output test PID command PID output Input impedance of the external device Min 5kQ 0 to 10 VDC output Input impedance of the external device Max 500Q 4 to 20 mA DC output While the terminal is outputting O to 10 VDC an output less than 0 3 V may become 0 0 V While the terminal is outputting O to 10 VDC it is capable of driving up to two meters with 10 KQ impedance While outputting the current to drive a meter with 500 Q impedance max Adjustable range of the gain 0 to 200 The monitor signal for analog DC current 4 to 20 mA is output You can select one of the following signal functions with function code F35 Output frequency Output current Output voltage Output torque Load factor Input power PID feedback value DC link bus voltage Universal AO Motor output Analog output test PID command PID output Input impedance of the external device Max 5009 It is capable of driving a meter with a maximum of 500Q impedance Adjustable gain range 0 to 200 11 An
240. nt restart after a recovery from momentary power failure does not work properly as designed To solve this connect the interlock command IL line to the auxiliary contact of the magnetic contactor so that a momentary power failure can sure be detected During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power has been recovered the inverter is restarted at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Auto restarting after Momentary Power Failure Power Failure Recovery F14 4 V V DC Link Undervoltage Bus Voltage os Searching for Motor Speed Output Frequency Motor Speed Acceleration IPF 5 36 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Allowable momentary power failure time H16 H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration 0 0 to 30 0 seconds from an occurrence of a momentary power failure undervoltage until the inverter is to be restarted Specify the coast to stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated If the power is recovered within the specified duration the inverter restarts in the restart mode specified by F14 If the power is recove
241. nter a Run command for the rotation direction you have chosen To switch to reverse rotation change the setting of function code F02 The display of or stays lit and tuning takes place while the motor is stopped Maximum tuning time approximately 40 s eS 8 O If the function code P04 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning takes place Upon completion of measurements the motor will coast to stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 10 s Deceleration time If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as the Run command F02 1 7 will appear upon completion of the measurements The Run command is turned OFF and the tuning completes with the next function code Zi5 displayed on the keypad the Run command given through the keypad or the communications link is automatically turned OFF E Errors during tuning Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning it will display and discard the tuning data Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning l An inter phase imbalance has been detected Abnormal result of tuning Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Abnormal ou
242. nutes the inverter automatically goes back to the Running mode and the back light goes OFF 3 13 3 4 1 Setting function codes 1 Data Setting Menu 1 Data Setting in Programming Mode allows you to set function codes according to your needs Table 3 8 lists the function codes available on the FRENIC Eco Table 3 8 Function Codes an on FRENIC Eco Function Code Group Function Code o o Desain o F code F00 to F44 Fundamental Fundamental functions used in operation of the Fundamental functions functions motor E code Terminal Functions concerning the selection of operation of Extension terminal E01 to E99 functions the control circuit terminals Functions concerning functions the display on the LED monitor code Control Control functions of C01 to C53 Functions associated with frequency settings functions frequency P code P01 to P99 Motor Functions for setting up characteristics Motor parameters parameters parameters such as capacity of the motor H code High performance H03 to H98 functions 1 eode J01 to J22 a VEleation Functions for applications such as PID Control Application functions functions vcore 01 to y99 Enk Functions for controlling communications Link functions y y functions g E E AA 027 to 059 aes Functions for optional features Note Note The o code is displayed only when the corresponding optional feature is installed For details of the o code refer to the Instruction Manual for the cor
243. ode data to the values on the nameplate of the motor Although no PTC thermistor is used the V2 PTC switch is turned to PTC which means that the thermistor input is active on the PTC H26 gt Set H26 PTC thermistor Input to 0 inactive 11 2 5 Fuse blown 125HP or above Problem Possible Causes 1 The fuse blew because of 12 ASF Charger circuit fault Problem a short circuiting inside the inverter The fuse inside the inverter blew What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether there has been any excess surge or noise coming from outside Take measures against surges and noise gt Have the inverter repaired 50HP or above 208 V 75HP or above 460 V Possible Causes 1 Control power was not supplied to the magnetic contactor intended for short circuiting the charging resistor The magnetic contactor for short circuiting the resistor for charging failed to work What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether in normal connection of the main circuit not connection via the DC link bus the connector CN on the power supply printed circuit board is not inserted to NC gt Insert the connector to FAN Check whether you have quickly turned the circuit breaker ON and OFF to confirm safety after cabling wiring gt Wait until the DC link bus voltage has dropped to a sufficiently low level and then reset the current alarm and turn ON the power again Do
244. odels of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur 10 6 FRN150F1S 4U 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below Point A _ Point B O thm CISen INU FISD menai Figure 10 4 Internal Location Diagram FRN150F1S 4U Point A As shown below remove the screw M4 to release the wire end terminal and secure the terminal to the support with the screw removed Tightening torque 15 9lb in 1 8 N m Wire end Figure 10 5 PointA Point B As shown below cut the cable tie insulation lock with a nipper to remove the protective cap Remove the screw M5 and secure the wire end terminal with the screw removed Tightening torque 31 0lb in 3 5 N m Wire end terminal Screw M5 Figure 10 6 Pont B 10 7 FRN200F1S 4U 1 Remove the front cover Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 Wiring 2 Change wiring at points A and B shown in the internal location diagram below Point B Figure 10 7 Inter
245. odes of the inverter a Shifts the cursor to the right when entering a number Pressing this key after removing the cause of an alarm will switch the inverter to Running Mode LED indicator indexes Used to reset a setting or screen transition UP and DOWN keys Used to select the setting items or change the function code Operation data displayed on the LED monitor Key Function Data key Switches the operation as follows E In Running Mode Pressing this key switches the information to be displayed concerning the status of the inverter output frequency Hz output current A output voltage V etc E In Programming Mode Pressing this key displays the function code and confirms the data you have entered E In Alarm Mode Pressing this key displays the details of the problem indicated by the alarm code that has come up on the LED monitor a q Starts running the motor forward rotation ons l l Starts running the motor reverse rotation Run Operation ZON STOP p REM Pressing this toggle key for more than 1 second switches between Local and Remote modes LED Lights while a run command is supplied to the inverter Indicator 3 2 Items Displayed on LED Indicators C e capone teannayennmnd O On fomaem OOS CO owe an Data greater than 99 999 Data greater than 99 999 than 99 999 Constant feeding rate time constant feeding rate time setting Not applicable to FRENIC Eco Time PID proce
246. of function codes E80 and E81 E Inverter in remote operation RMT Function code data 54 This output signal comes ON when the inverter switches from local to remote mode For details about the remote and local modes refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 E Switching the operation mode between remote and local E Terminal C1 off signal C1OFF This output signal comes ON when the input current of terminal C1 is less than 2mA and goes OFF when it is 2mA or more E Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode 5 58 E31 E32 E34 E35 Frequency detection FDT Detection level Frequency detection FDT Hysteresis width This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 To utilize this feature you need to assign FDT data 2 to any of digital output terminals Refer to the descriptions of E20 through E22 E24 and E27 Output frequency Set frequency Frequency detected FDT Detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 Release level Time Frequency detected FDT Time Overload Early Warning Current Detection Level Overload Early Warning Current Detection Timer E34 and E35
247. olytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating 2 The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package to within 70 3 If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control board at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to motors or run the motor Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Item Specifications Output Site location Indoors Altitude current derating Ambient 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F Note 1 factor temperature Relative 5 to 95 No condensation 3300f1 1000m or lower 100 humidity 3300ft 1000m to 4900ft 1500m 0 97 Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or wair drops 6600ft 2000m to 8200t 2500m 0
248. ometer 3g Voltage input for Rih Alarm relay output setting 0 to 10 VDC for any fault a s Voltage input for Relay output setting 0 to 10 VDC i lt Current input for gt setting 4 to 20 mA DC i e e C Analog meter CR oe Y care E vammen y E p O D si w DCR DC Reactor i t pi GFCI Ground Fault Circuit H ar Al X Interrupt 3 ft pter 2 MC Magnetic Contactor E A P MCCB Molded Case Z a Circuit Breaker A 3 5 t Sevcces P3 Cc Note7 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 When connecting a DC reactor DCR first remove the short bar between terminals P1 and P A DCR is optional for inverters below 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V but standard for inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above For inverters of 75HP for 208V 100HP for 460V or above be sure to connect a DCR To protect wiring insert a molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection of the type recommended for the inverter between the commercial power supply and the inverter Do not use a circuit breaker with a capacity exceeding the recommended capacity In addition to an MCCB or GFCI insert if necessary a magnetic contactor MC of the type recommended for the inverter to cut off the commercial power supply to the inverter Furthermore if the coil of the MC or solenoid comes
249. on KP lt CINV KP OINV KP INV VERIFY KPDATA CHECK KP INV READ Do 75F1Ss 2 D i 3 7 5F1S 4 yan Aav READ DATAIEINV DATA2 DATA3 ZSENI FD READING IDATAIEINY DATA2 DATAS TL READING END DATATEINY DATA2 DATA3 ae weet RES Error screens ERROR DATATEINY DATA2 DATAS TL ERROR DATAI CINV DATA2 DATAS we eerie RES List of data copy operations Select desired operation by moving the cursor with Q i V key Press key to finalize desired operation Data selection screen i Select desired data by moving the cursor with N V key To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Press key to finalize desired data Confirmation screen If Read is actually performed the data read out from the inverter will overwrite the data held in this memory area in the keypad If OK press key To go back to Data selection screen press eset key Press key to start Read operation In progress screen A bar indicating progress appears in the bottom Upon completion Completion screen automatically appears Completion screen Indicates that Read operation has completed successfully To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key If you press rc key during Read operation the operation under way will be aborted and this Error screen will appear Note Once aborted all the data held in the keypad s memory would be deleted If a com
250. on code data is changed from the factory setting 1 Check if the LED monitor displays means that the frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 If the LED monitor displays numbers except 7 7 then press N V keys to set iLi as the frequency command 2 Check if a built in cooling fan rotates When only the auxiliary power is fed while the main power is turned OFF the cooling fan does not rotate For the inverter of 1HP for 208V 2HP for 460V or below no cooling fan is mounted Figure 4 2 Display of the LED Monitor after Power on 4 1 3 Preparation before running the motor for a test Setting function code data Before starting running the motor set function code data specified in Table 4 1 to the motor ratings and your system design values For the motor check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 Setting up function codes quickly using Quick setup Refer to the function code HO3 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory default setting of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data 4 1 Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test Base frequency 60 0 Hz iS Se Rated voltage LII at base frequency 460 V Pga Motor param
251. on deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration deceleration time 5 65 H09 H17 Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency linear torque but slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor e Accl Torque Accl Output kW Output Frequency Base Frequency F04 Output Frequency The figures at left show the acceleration characteristics Maximum l Similar characteristics apply Frequency inps to the deceleration F03 Base Frequency oy F04 Time sa Reference Accl Time Cote Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time considering the machinery s Ss load torque Select Starting Characteristics Auto search for idling motor speed Select Starting Characteristics Frequency for idling motor speed H09 and H17 specify the auto search mode for idling motor speed and its frequency respectively to run the idling motor without stopping it The auto search mode can be switched by assigning the STM terminal command to one of digital input terminals E01 to E05 function code data 26 If no STM is assigned the inverter interprets it as STM
252. on of the option in 4 digits Note 1 To reset the input watt hour and input watt hour data to 0 set function code E51 to 0 000 Note 2 For details of errors refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual 3 23 Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 5 MAINTENANC by using Q and 3 keys moving gt 3 Press the key to display the screen for Maintenance 1 page out of a total of 7 pages 4 Select the page for the desired item by using Q and V keys and confirm the Maintenance data for the desired item 5 Press the key to go back to the menu Figure 3 16 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 5 MAINTENANC menu 3 24 QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AV gt MENU SHIFY 2 DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR 4 I O CHECK Fis MAINTENANC AV3MENU SHIF 14h 493V 38 88 TIMES EDC TMP I TMP F TCAP 61000h TFAN 31h 61000h NST 0 Wh 999900kWh 2265 INTENAN CEZa MAIN KP 0000 0000 Select desired menu by moving the pointer j with amp key Press key to finalize desired menu Cumulative run time DC link circuit voltage Max temperature inside the inverter Max temperature of heat sink Max effective current Capacitance of the DC bus capacitor Cumulativ
253. on time or frequency different from the commanded ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur The ro key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with function code F02 0 2 or 3 When the keypad operation is disabled prepare an emergency stop switch separately for safe operations Switching the run command source from keypad local to external equipment remote by turning ON the Enable communications link command LE or Switch run command 2 1 command FR2 FR1 disables the roe key To enable the Gr0 key for an emergency stop select the STOP key priority with function code H96 1 or 3 If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON a sudden start will occur Ensure that the Run command signal is turned OFF in advance Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Eco User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the po
254. onnected to the terminals of the DC link bus For details refer to Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Detection of DC fan lock 208 V 50HP or above 460 V 75HP or above An inverter of 50HP or above 208 V or of 75HP or above 460 V is equipped with the internal air circulation DC fan When the inverter detects that the DC fan is locked by a failure or other Cause you can select either continuing the inverter operation or entering into alarm state Entering alarm state The inverter issues the alarm and coasts to stop the motor Continuing operation The inverter does not enter the alarm mode and continues operation of the motor Note that however the inverter turns on OH and LIFE signals on the transistor output terminals whenever the DC fan lock is detected regardless your selection Cote If ON OFF control of the cooling fan is enabled HO6 1 the cooling fan may stop depending on operating condition of the inverter In this case the DC fan lock detection feature is considered normal e g the cooling fan is normally stopped by the stop fan command so that the inverter may turn off the LIFE or OH signal output or enable to cancel the alarm even if the internal air circulation DC fan is locked due to a failure etc When you start the inverter in this state it automatically issues the run fan command then the inverter detects the DC fan lock state and turn on the LIFE or OH output or ente
255. or Operation on Hand 2 35 2 Parts needed for connection To mount install a keypad on a place other than an inverter parts listed below are needed Extension cable Note 1 CB 5S CB 3S and CB 1S 3 cables available in length of 16 4ft 9 8ft and 3 3ft 5m 3m and 1m Fastening screw M3 x O Note 2 Two screws needed Purchase off the shelf ones separately Note 1 When using an off the shelf LAN cable use a 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type cable compliant to US ANSI TIA EIA 568A Category 5 Less than 66ft 20m Recommended LAN cable Manufacturer SANWA Supply Co LTD Model KB 10T5 01K 3 3ft 1m KB STP 01K 3 3ft 1m Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive Note 2 When mounting on an enclosure wall use the screws fitted to the thickness of the wall Refer to Figure 2 34 2 4 2 Mounting installing steps E Mounting a keypad on the enclosure wall Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hook pointed to by the arrow in Figure 2 32 Figure 2 32 Removing a Keypad Make a cut out on the enclosure wall For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 3 Multi function keypad Mount the Multi function keypad onto the enclosure with 2 screws as shown in Figure 2 33 Recommended tightening torque 0 7 N m RJ 45 cornecbor En tlosure r Ma x 12 gt To ba provided by the customer ao Rig i fi Fi fi Fa 2 a Figure 2 33 Mounting Multi function Keypad 2 36
256. or details refer to Appendix A of the FRENIC Eco User s Manual gt Enable the auto resetting H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor causing the noise Problem DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred 2 The power to the inverter was switched back on too soon with F14 1 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the range of the inverter s specifications 4 Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect 5 Other loads were connected to the same power source and required a large current to start running to the extent that it caused a temporary voltage drop on the supply side 6 Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because power transformer capacity was insufficient 5 m Input phase loss What to Check and Suggested Measures Reset the alarm gt If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 3 4 or 5 depending on the load Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its control circuit was still operating gt Switch ON the power again after the display on the keypad has disappeared Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications Measure the input voltage to fin
257. ossibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application A WARNING e FRENIC Eco is designed to drive a three phase induction motor Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur FRENIC Eco may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though FRENIC Eco is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING e Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur e Do not place flammable matter nearby Doing so could cause fire ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an acciden
258. overs and inverter case Upper Front Cover Fastening Screws M5x8 Lower Front Cover Wire to from the inverter after removing the lower front cover Fastening Screws M5x8 Upper Front Cover The upper front cover is removable as well as shown above Tightening torque 31 0Ib in 3 5 N m Figure 2 9 Removing the Front Covers FRN350F1S 4U 2 3 2 Removing and mounting the cable guide plate for models of 1 to 25HP for 208V and 1 to 30HP for 460V For inverters of 25HP for 208V 30HP for 460V or below use the cable guide plate to secure IP20 protective structure Follow the steps to work on it E Removing the cable guide plate Before to proceed remove the terminal block cover in advance Remove the cable guide plate fastening screw and pull the cable guide plate ee eae on eee Cable Guide Plate Fastening Screw Figure 2 10 Removing the Cable Guide Plate FRNO15F1S 2U E Opening half punched holes and mounting rubber bushes D Tap the three half punched holes of the cable guide plate by using a screwdriver grip end or the like and punch them out CNote Be careful not to injure yourself by sharp cutting edges of parts Set the three attached rubber bushes in the punched holes Make cut outs on the rubber bushes before wiring ee ee a Cut outs Half punched Holes Attached Rubber Bushes Figure 2 11 Punching out the Holes and Mounting the Rubber Bushes A WARNING
259. ower failure Enable After a momentary power failure when power is restored and then a run command is input restart will begin at the starting Restart at the frequency commanded by function code F23 starting frequency ae NOT for low inertia load This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure A WARNING If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 3 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Otherwise an accident could occur 5 34 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage level while the inverter in running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is recov
260. p are highlighted names are highlighted Select the function code to be added not highlighted by moving the cursor with N and V keys To go back to the menu press eset key Press key to add it to Quick setup Select the function code to be deleted highlighted by moving the cursor with N and V keys To go back to the menu press eset key Press key to delete it from Quick setup To go back to Menu press eset key Figure 3 28 Menu Transition for Changing Function Codes Covered by Quick Setup 3 41 3 4 12 Performing communication debugging 11 COMM DEBUG Menu 11 COMM DEBUG in Programming Mode allows you to view the data of communication related function codes S M W X and Z codes to help debug programs for communication with an upper level device Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 11 COMM DEBUG by using Q and V keys moving ES 3 Press the key to get the list of communication related function codes 4 Select the function code by using O and V keys moving ES 5 Press the key to check or change the function code 6 Press the key to return to the menu Figure 3 29 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 11 COMM DEBUG menu QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3
261. perate the inverter For an access to universal DI via the RS 485 or field bus communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals E Select starting characteristics STM Function code data 26 This digital terminal command determines at the start of operation whether or not to search for idling motor speed and follow it For details of auto search for idling motor speed refer to HO9 and H17 Select starting characteristics E Force to stop STOP Function code data 30 Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop during the time specified by H56 Deceleration time for forced stop After the motor stops the inverter enters the i y alarm state with alarm 4 Apply this command to a failsafe facility E Select local keypad operation LOC Function code data 35 This terminal command switches the source of the run command and frequency command between remote and local by an external digital input signal For details of the local mode refer to W Switching the operation mode between remote and local in Chapter 3 Section 3 3 1 E Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Function code data 39 Turning this terminal command ON supplies a DC current to the motor that is on halt in order to generate heat preventing dew condensation For details of dew condensation protection refer to function code J21 Dew condensation prevention Duty
262. power failure waiting time H13 This function specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level Note that even when power is recovered restart will not take place until the waiting time H13 has elapsed Power Failure Recovery t Y DC Link Bus Voltage p ee ie ee te a ea Undervoltage Level State of the Inverter Burni i Operation 1 unning Ready to Run Run Command ON ON 1 State of the Inverter Start Runnin Operation 2 Gate Signal ON Gate turned OFF raa e On Restart E Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long waiting time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs A a Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds Function code H13 Restart mode after momentary power failure
263. pped P04 1 and Tuning while the motor is running P04 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times FO7 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Data for Motor parameters subject to Tuning Choose the process when The motor cannot be rotated or Primary resistance R1 Measure R1 and X while more than 50 of the rated load Leakage reactance X the motor is stopped would be applied on the motor if rotated Even if the motor is rotated it is safe and the load applied on the motor would be no more than 50 of the rating If you do the tuning with no load you will get the highest precision Measure R1 and X while Primary resistance R1 the motor is stopped and Leakage reactance X later no load current while No load current the motor is running At 50 of the Base frequency Upon completion of the tuning the primary resistance R1 will be automatically saved into P07 the leakage reactance X into P08 and the no load current into PO6 4 2 3 Preparation of Machine System Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the safety device 4 Perform tuning Set function code P04 to 1 or 2 and press the key The blinking of or z on the LED monitor will slow down E
264. pprox 90 C during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of material that can withstand temperatures of this level Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are ORI PROT ON maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the enclosure of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the enclosure l as the temperature around the inverter will tend to increase Do not 2 0inch SOmm for models install the inverter in a small enclosure with poor ventilation Aa Veeeles 12 ort OF Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances 2 1 E When mounting two or more inverters Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more inverters are to be installed in the same unit or enclosure If it is necessary to mount the inverters vertically install a partition plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C 104 F or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any gap between them only for inverters with a capacity of 5HP for 208V 7 5HP for 460V or below E When employing external cooling At the shipment time the inverter is set up for mount inside your equipment or enclosure so that cooling is don
265. put current of the inverter For details refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment 8 2 2 Communications specifications of keypad No of linkable unit Table 8 2 Hardware specifications Specification One to one connection with an inverter Remarks For a remote site operation Link cable US ANSI TIA EIA 568A category 5 compliant straight type cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight type Extension cable for the remote site operation CB 5S CB 3S CB 1S and etc Maximum cable length 65 6ft 20m Connector Pin number Standard RJ 45 connector jack Table 8 3 Pin Assignment of RJ 45 Connector Description Refer to Table 8 3 Remarks 1 and 8 Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC 2 and 7 Grounding lines 0 V to the ground 3 and 6 Reserved 4 RS 485 communications data line 5 RS 485 communications data line 8 4 8 2 3 Data transmission specifications Station address Table 8 4 Data Transmission Specification Specification No need to specify Communications protocol Modbus RTU Synchronization system Asynchronous start stop system Communications system Half duplex Transmission speed 19 200 bps Parity Even Stop bits 1 bit Error checking CRC 16 8 5 Remarks To use any keypad no setup is needed for RS 485 communications related functio
266. r via communications with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low 5 The acceleration time was too long What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function code F03 Maximum frequency gt Readjust the data of F03 Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter high gt Readjust the data of F15 Check the signals for the frequency command from the control circuit terminals with Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase frequency of the command gt If an external potentiometer for frequency command signal converter switches or relay contacts are malfunctioning replace them gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 C1 and V2 correctly Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency commana Refer to the FRENIC Eco User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g The higher priority run command is mistakenly canceled etc Check the data of function code F07 Acceleration time 1 gt Change the acceleration deceleration time to match the load 6 3 Possible Causes 6 Overload 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor 8 The curr
267. rd power PCB this function stops the inverter Applicable to 208 V 50HP or above and 460 V 75HP or above When the inverter has stopped because of a trip this function allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart You can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop and reset Protects the inverter against a surge voltage which might appear between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command because of a broken wire etc this function issues an alarm and continues the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 ms this function stops the inverter output If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload condition alarm code Li or LILLI the output frequency of the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Not applicable 8 19 LED Alarm monitor output displays 30A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Eco Use them in accordance with your syst
268. rdless of the load fluctuation Specify the data for FO9 in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 50 of starting torque 5 29 ra Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause Note Papi x overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Output Voltage V Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Increased Output Voltage using Torque Boost F09 Non linear V f Pattern Voltage H51 Torque Boost F09 Output Frequency 0 Non linear V f Base Hz Pattern Frequency Frequency H50 F04 E Automatic torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load automatic torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor Cote e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency F04 the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 though P03 and PO6 though
269. re K w Charging Lamp Lamp PPRRHHRBA 4 Charing Figure E O Lamp a Charging Lamp 29 5 HA o k LIR LYS L3 T ae oP eT P1 Figure L O Figure F Charging Figure M Charing amp HAA Lamp 0 10 N KIEA 2 7 S18 2 Figure G 7 ee 09 els x Osc 2 12 2 The control circuit terminals common to all models Screw size M3 Tightening torque 4 4 to 5 3lb in 0 5 to 0 6 N m Table 2 7 Control Circuit Terminals Dimension of openings in the Bared wire length control circuit terminals Screwdriver to be used Head style Allowable wire size ____ zzz Th W Pean Flat head AWG26 to AWG16 0 28 inch 7 mm 0 10 W x 0 11 H inch 0 6 x 3 5 mm 0 14 to 1 5 mm i 2 75 W x 2 86 H mm 3 The RS 485 communication terminals DX DX SD DX DX SD Screw size M3 Tightening torque 4 4 Ib in 0 5 N m 2 3 4 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 8 lists the recommended wire sizes Those for main circuits are examples for using a single wire for 60 75 C 140 167 F at an ambient temperature of 50 C 122 F Table 2 8 Recommended Wire Sizes Recommended wire size mm 1 Nominal Main circuits applied Main circuit power Auxiliary Auxiliary motor Inverter type input Cro ndin Inverter Power L2 S o G g output Input U V W Ctrl cet W DCR DCR w o DCR DCR
270. re used to feed power to the fans while they are not used in any power system of ordinary configuration The fan power is Single phase 200 to 220 VAC 50 Hz 200 to 230 VAC 60 Hz for 208 V 50HP or above Single phase 380 to 440 VAC 50 Hz 380 to 480 VAC 60 Hz for 460 V 75HP or above 2 23 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically designed to withstand a high electric field i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident A CAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur Table 2 10 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise referring to the
271. red after the specified duration the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Power Failure Recovery f Y DC Link Bus Voltage SUS ig H aa a a f Undervoltage Level Time Reserved to Restart About 0 3 to 0 6 s State of the Inverter Gate Signal on Ready to Run Run Command ON ON Operation Case 1 m No Power 4 Restart Run Command i Operation Case 2 2D i H16 ON Start of Normal Running If you set the allowable momentary power failure time H16 to 999 restart will take place until the DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power failure as shown below If the DC link bus voltage drops below the allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts normal starting Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure Power supply Allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure 460 V 100 V Fa The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of Note ae undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after momentary power failure greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity the presence of options and other factors 5 37 E Auto restart after a recovery from momentary
272. requency command press the Q V key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s internal non volatile memory It is kept there even while the inverter is powered OFF and will be used as the initial frequency next time the inverter is powered ON 3 8 C Tip The frequency setting can be saved either automatically as mentioned above or by pressing the S key You can choose either way using function code E64 f e When you start specifying or changing the frequency command or any other parameter with the Ww V key the lowest digit on the display will blink and start changing As you are holding the key down blinking will gradually move to the upper digit places and the upper digits will be changeable e Pressing the Cs key moves the changeable digit place blinking and thus allows you to change upper digits easily e By setting function code C30 to 0 Keypad operation AW V key and selecting frequency command 2 as the frequency setting method you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same manner using the N Y key e f you have set the function code F01 to 0 Keypad operation AW V key but have selected a frequency setting other than frequency 1 i e frequency 2 set it via communications or as a multistep frequency then you cannot use the O V key for setting the frequency command even if the keypad is in Running Mode Pressing either of these keys will just display th
273. responding optional feature High level Highly added value functions Functions for functions sophisticated control E Function codes requiring simultaneous keying To modify the data for function code FOO data splofecton H03 data Initialization or H97 clear alarm data simultaneous keying is needed involving the roe key the O key or the roe key the V key E Modifying function code data during running making the modification valid and saving the modification Some function codes can be modified while the inverter is running whereas others cannot Further depending on the function code modifications may or may not become effective immediately For details refer to the Change when running column in 5 1 Function Code Tables in Chapter 5 of the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual For details of function codes refer to 5 1 Function Code Tables in Chapter 5 of the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Figure 3 10 illustrates LCD screen transition for Menu item 1 DATA SET Menu screen g Function code list screen Screen for modifying l QUICK SET TIDATA PRTC function code data DATA SET DATA CHECK ZIeeFREQ CMD 1 amp OPR MNTR i AFJOPR METHOD I O CHECK Morr METHOD MAINTENANC 2 KP FWD ALM INF EIMA x Hz Oo s3 ALM CAUSE s AV DATA ADJUS DATA COPY LOAD FCTR USER SET s COMM DEBUG SOmMWYOOSAN O0 60 OHz TaAEIJLOADER 50 O 120 O AV DATA ADJU Figure 3 10 Screen Transition for
274. ress the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 9 LOAD FCTR by using O and Q keys moving gt 3 Press the key to get the measurement mode selection screen 3 4 Select the measurement mode by using Q and V keys moving gt 5 5 Press the key to start the measurement For start to stop mode you will be prompted to enter a run command via a confirmation screen For details refer to the LCD screen transition chart 6 Press the key to return to the menu Figure 3 25 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 9 LOAD FCTR menu 1 Selecting measurement mode QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AV gt MENU SHIFY Select desired menu by moving the pointer 4 with O V key 6 ALM INF 7 ALM CAUSE B DATA COPY 9 LOAD FCTR AVOMENU SHIFT To finalize desired menu press amp key MODE SELECT Mode selection screen HOURS SET HOURS SET Measurement takes place for specified duration START STOP Measurement takes place from start to stop EXECUTING EXECUTING Measurement is taking place according to the AV specified duration set in HOURS SET To return to Menu press key Figure 3 25 Menu Transition for Selecting Measurement Mode 3 38 2 Selecting hours set mode MODE SELECT HOURS SET ISTARTDSTOP EXECUTING LOADF ACTORA MODE SELECT HOURS SET STARTPSTOP EXECUTING TIAE Av
275. rews to fix the filter onto Bundled screws to fix the adapter panel mount adapter onto inverter 7 5HP FRNOO7F1S 4U EFL 7 5G11 4 MA F1 5 5 Four M8 x 20 screws Four M5 x 15 screws 20HP FRNO20F1S 4U EFL 15G11 4 MA F1 15 Four M8 x 20 screws Four M8 x 25 screws From power supply lines From power supply lines N f Filters To motor te Ann To motor i Shield grounding clamps A Footmount style B Split style Figure 10 2 Installing Inverter and EMC compliant Filter 10 5 The EMC compliant filter and the inverter should be connected with each other according to the procedure given below The wiring on the inverter and motor should be performed by an authorized electrical engineer In order to ensure compliance with the EMC Directive this procedure should be followed as closely as possible E Basic connection procedure 1 Install the inverter and the EMC compliant filter on a grounded metal plate Use a shielded cable also for connection to the motor and make it as short as possible Connect the shield layer of the cable firmly to the metal plate Also at the motor side connect the shield layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 Use a shielded cable for connection of control circuit lines of the inverter and also for connection of the signal cable of an RS 485 communications card As with the motor clamp the shield layer of the cable firmly to a grounded plate 3 If noise radiated from th
276. rmal operation inverse operation Sleep function Anti reset windup function PID output limiter Integration reset hold Auto search for idling Starting at the preset frequency the inverter automatically searches the idling motor speed motors speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it without stopping it Automatic deceleration Upon a DC link bus vous exceeding the San limit level during deceleration the deceleration time a ically extends to avoid an GU trip Deceleration The motor loss increases during deceleration to reduce the load energy regenerating at the characteristic inverter to avoid an GU trip upon mode selection Automatic energy The output voltage is controlled to minimize the total sum of the motor loss and inverter loss saving operatio at a constant speed Overload protection The output frequency is automatically reduced to suppress the overload protection trip of control the inverter caused by an increase in the ambient temperature or motor load or by other g conditions The motor parameters are automatically tuned Cooling fan ON OFF Detects inverter internal temperature and stops cooling fan when the temperature is low _ An external output can control be issued in a transistor or relay output signal An inverter controls multiple driving pumps at a time combining with driving sources of the inverter and commercial power The inverter s integrated PID controller controls them in the flowrate pressure and
277. rol circuit or ground Connect a surge absorber in parallel with a coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor 3 Leakage current Harmonic component current generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitors of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occur take an appropriate measure against them Table 2 12 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit Decrease the carrier frequency breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter that is connected to the input primary has tripped Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter Use an earth leakage circuit breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter that has a longer sensitive current than one currently being used Use an earth leakage circuit breaker a ground fault circuit interrupter that Wun OVE TCU MENN protection features measures against harmonic component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay was Decrease the carrier frequency activated Increase the settling current of the thermal relay Use the electronic thermal relay built in the inverter instead of an external thermal relay 2 38 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE MULTI FUNCTION KEYPAD 3 1 Key LED and LCD Monitors on the Keypad The keypad allows you to start and stop the motor view various data including maintenance inform
278. rounding wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly Note that FRENIC Eco series inverter is designed for three phase input and driving three phase motors A WARNING e Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur 2 Check for short circuits between terminals and exposed live parts and ground faults Inverter 3 Check for loose terminals connectors and screws SC WR ws LT U vV w G 4 Check if the motor is separated from mechanical O O O G equipment 5 Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not start or operate erroneously at power on 6 Check if safety measures are taken against runaway of the Power system e g a defense to protect people from supply unexpectedly approaching your power system Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 2 Turning ON power and checking WARNING Be sure to install the covers for both the main circuit terminal block control circuit terminal block and the front cover if any before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on e Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no functi
279. rrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns off its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Disable An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Enable 1 The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time Cnote Function codes F43 and F44 have current limit functions similar to that of function code H12 Since the current limit functions of F43 and F44 implement the current control by software an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limit by F43 and F44 enable the current limit operation by H12 as well to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate the current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing the system oscillation hunting or activating the inverter overvoltage trip 4 _ alarm When setting the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load Communications Link Function Mode selection Bus Link Function Function selection H30 and y98 specify the sources of a frequency command and run commanc in
280. rs the 77 alarm state Note that operating the inverter under the condition that the DC fan is locked for long time may shorten the life of electrolytic capacitors on the control PCB due to local high temperature inside the inverter Be sure to check with the LIFE signal etc and replace the broken fan as soon as possible To set data of the function code H98 assign functions to each bit total 6 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit 5 73 Judge the Sam Lower the Detect DC life of DC jucgment pect Detect input carrier phase loss frequency automatically Function criteria of output DC link bus phase loss capacitor Data 0 Enter into Disable Use the Disable Disable Disable the alarm factory state default fan lock link bus capacitor Data 1 Continue Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable the operation Example of Enter into Enable 1 Use the Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal the alarm factory expression state 0 default 0 19 5 74 Conversion table Decimal to from binary Binary Binary Decimal Decimal 32 P bP be PEPE 5 75 J21 Dew Condensation Prevention Duty When the inverter is stopped dew condensation on the motor can be prevented by feeding DC power to the motor at regular intervals to keep the temperature of the motor above a certain level To utilize this feature you need to assign a terminal comman
281. run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV 3 The setting for the rotation direction via keypad operation is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the respective U V and W terminals of the motor Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV Correct the data of the function codes and the connection Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 Enable Fd Gr0 keys on keypad forward or 3 Enable rev Groe keys on keypad reverse 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuated What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 and C43 for the frequency command Possible Causes 2 3 4 5 The external frequency command source device was used Frequency switching or multistep frequency command was enabled The connection between the inverter and the motor was too long The inverter output is hunting due to vibration caused by low stiffness of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters Wha
282. ry to use a Fuji inverter in connection with an EMC compliant filter option and install it in accordance with the instructions contained in this instruction manual Install the Fuji inverter in a metal enclosure To use Fuji EMC filter built in inverters refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Supplement for EMC Filter Built in Type Chapter 10 CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS 10 5 2 EMC compliant filter Option There are two installation styles of an optional EMC compliant filter Footmount and split styles As listed on the next page the footmount style applies to inverters with 3 phase 460 V 1 to 30HP for 460V and the split style to inverters with 3 phase 208 V 30 to125HP 3 phase 460 V 40 to 350HP For how to install the EMC compliant filter see Section 10 5 3 Recommended installation of EMC compliant filter The use of an EMC compliant filter increases leakage current as shown on the next page 10 3 Table 10 1 EMC compliant Filters and Leakage Current PONET i Leakage current mA 1 2 supply Inverter type Bye ome lent j l Installation style filter model voltage Normal condition Worst condition FRN001F1S 2U FRN002F1S 2U EFL 4 0E11 2 FRN003F1S 2U FRN005F1S 2U 3 phase 208 V FRNOO7F1S 2U EFL 7 5E11 2 FRNO10F1S 2U EFL 15SP 2 FRNO15F1S 2U FRNO20F1S 2U EFL 22SP 2 FRNO25F 1S 2U Split style See Figure 10 2 B FRNO30F1S 2U FS5536 180 40 FRNO40F1S 2U FS5536 250 28 FRNOSOF 1S 2U FRNO60F 1S 2U FR
283. s Table 2 9 Symbols Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals Symba L1 R L2 S L3 T Connect the 3 phase input power lines inputs Inverter outputs Connect a 3 phase motor RO TO Auxiliary power input for For a backup of the control circuit power supply connect AC the control circuit power lines same as that of the main power input DC reactor connection Connect a DC reactor DCR for improving power factor an option for the inverter whose capacity is 60HP for 208V 75HP for 460V or below P N DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter s An optional regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals Auxiliary power input for Normally no need to use these terminals Use these terminals for the fans an auxiliary power input of the fans in a power system using a power regenerative PWM converter RHC series Grounding for inverter Grounding terminals for the inverter s chassis or case and and motor motor Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding terminal of the motor Inverters provide a pair of grounding terminals that function equivalently 2 15 Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter Figure 2 12 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment Wiring procedure Grounding terminals G Inverter output terminals U V W and G DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P Switching connectors For t
284. s 208V for three phase 208V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or tripping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1kHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating 5 Use R1 T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the terminals are not used 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque Varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 Voltage unbalance Max voltage V Min voltage V _ x 67 IEC61800 3 5 2 3 Three phase average voltage V If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR n D 5 oO oc J Q Cooling method Cooling method Fan cooling 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 460 V E 1 to 75HP Item Specifications Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480V With AVR function Overload capability 120 of rated current for 1min Rated frequency 50 60Hz Three phase 380 to 440V 50Hz Three phase 380 to 480V 60Hz Output ratings Main power supply Three phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz Auxiliary control Sawer input Single phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz Single phase 380 to 440V 50Hz Single pha
285. s and or defective software hardware Relay converters e g RS 485 relay converter did not operate due to incorrect connections and settings or defective hardware Broken communications cable or poor contact A communications error occurred during RS 485 communications What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 with those of the host equipment gt Correct any settings that differ Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or make the no response error detection time be ignored yO8 0 Check the host equipment gt Remove the cause of the equipment error Check the RS 485 relay converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware such as recommended devices as appropriate Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable Possible Causes 6 Ahigh intensity noise was given to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Improve noise control gt Improve noise reduction measures on the host side gt Replace the RS 485 relay converter with a recommended insulated converter 23 amp Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter
286. s during operation press the eset key to reset the error condition When Reset is complete the screen will go back to List of data copy operations 3 34 4 Verify operation KP INV READ KP gt INV WRITE KPINV VERIFY KPDATA CHECK JSE AV gt TPEINV VERIFY Io 75F1S 2 VERIFY DATAI INV DATA2 VERIFING DATA INVI DATA2 DATAS LL ERROR DATAT JORIFREQ CMD 1 KP 1 INV O VERIFING DATAI INV DATA2 DATA3 CLLD VERIFING END DATA1S INV DATA2 DATA3 JSE RES List of data copy operations Select desired operation by moving the cursor with N Q key Press key to finalize desired operation Data selection screen Select data to be verified by moving the cursor with N Q key To go back to List of data copy operations press eset key Press key to finalize desired data Confirmation screen If OK press key To go back to Data selection screen press eset key Press key to start Verify operation In progress screen A bar indicating progress appears in the bottom When a mismatch is found the Verify operation is halted with the function code and its data displayed on the LCD Monitor To resume the Verify operation from the next function code press amp key again To resume Verify press key In progress screen A bar indicating progress appears in the bottom Upon completion Completion screen automatically appears Completion screen Indicates that Ver
287. screen Note The results of the measurement will be deleted when the inverter is powered OFF 3 40 3 4 11 Changing function codes covered by Quick setup 10 USER SET Menu 10 USER SET in Programming Mode allows you to change the set of function codes that are covered by Quick setup Basic key operation 1 When the inverter is powered ON it automatically enters Running Mode In Running Mode press the re key to enter Programming Mode The menu for function selection will be displayed 2 Select 10 USER SET by using Q and Q keys moving gt 3 Press the key to get the list of function codes 4 Select the function codes to be added or deleted by using Q and Q keys moving ES 5 Press the key to perform the addition or deletion 6 Press the eset key to return to the menu Figure 3 28 shows the LCD screen transition starting from the 10 USER SET menu QUICK SET DATA SET DATA CHECK 3 OPR MNTR AVOMENU SHIFY Select desired menu by moving the pointer 4 with Q KA key ALM CAUSE DATA COPY LOAD FCTR USER SET AV MENU SHIF Press key to finalize desired menu FOODATA PRTC FOITFREGQ CMD mErsOPR METHOD JOEIMAX Hz USER SE AVF MRD ATA PRTC FOITFREQ CMD 1 FOZOPR METHOD FOSMAX Hz A3 AV OF DATA PRTC MRIFREQ CMD 1 F o 2 Seared AEMAx Hz OIE ve List of function codes Lists function codes with their names The function codes covered by Quick setu
288. se 380 to 480V 60Hz is 2s 38 oa Tes ra wooo 25 es oe os vs i a7 arrow a z s e alee e o _ Sc E A Z DC injection braking Staring frequency 0 0 to 60 0Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0s Braking level 0 to 60 Cooling method Cooling method Ea Fan cooling Mass lbs kg 6 8 7 1 73 75 7 5 13 13 15 22 22 25 51 53 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 4 6 0 6 0 6 9 9 9 9 9 11 5 23 24 es Standard 4 pole motor 3 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 460V for three phase 460V 3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 An excessively low setting of the carrier frequency may result in the higher motor temperature or tripping of the inverter by its overcurrent limiter setting Lower the continuous load or maximum load instead When setting the carrier frequency F26 to 1kHz reduce the load to 80 of its rating 5 Use R1 T1 terminals for driving AC cooling fans of an inverter powered by the DC link bus such as by a high power factor PWM converter In ordinary operation the terminals are not used 6 Calculated under Fuji specified conditions 7 Obtained when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Average braking torque Varies with the efficiency of the motor Max voltage V Min voltage V Three phase average voltage V SOMIECGISOD 3 5 2 2 If this value is 2 to 3 use an AC reactor ACR wn D Cc Z O i Q
289. se harmonic components on the power source lines and reform the power factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 86 to 90 Note At the time of shipping a short bar is connected across the terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the short bar when connecting a DCR Output circuit Include an OFL in the inverter power output Secondary circuit to filters 1 Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor input terminals ORES This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents by the 400 V class of inverters 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output lines Cc 2 prar Q O E OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Note Use an OFL within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency Otherwise the filter will overheat Ferrite ring An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter reactors for An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation reducing radio for the power suppl
290. sing the N v key first switch to Running Mode These conditions are summarized in Table 3 5 and the figure below Table 3 5 shows the combinations of the parameters while the figure below illustrates how the manual speed command 1 entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command The setting and viewing procedures are the same as those for usual frequency setting Table 3 5 Speed Frequency Command Manually Set with C N V Key and Requirements Frequency Frequency setting command 1 via communications F01 link PID PID enabled PID output PID output as final frequency command _ final frequency command Disabled Disabled Manual speed setting by keypad Disabled frequency setting Multistep PID control frequency setting disabled Display during WY V key operation PID enabled PID output as final frequency command Other than the above Manual speed command currently selected Disabled frequency setting l F01 0 Link Disabled Manual Speed Command i eS OEE from Keypad 882 1 OFF PID Disabled Frequency Setting Other 0 Hz PID ON than above Command via Link Multi step Freq Command Final Frequency Command PID output as Frequency Command 3 11 3 3 3 LED monitor Monitoring the running status The eleven items listed below can be monitored on the LED Monitor Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specif
291. specifications A surge current entered the input power source The deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia for load The acceleration time was too short What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within that of the specifications If within the same power source a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated a surge temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current may be caused in the input power Install a DC reactor Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 gt Enable the regenerative braking H69 3 or automatic deceleration H71 1 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to 0 to improve braking ability Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 6 9 Possible Causes 5 Braking load was too heavy 6 Malfunction caused by noise 4 Undervoltage What to Check and Suggested Measures Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 to O to improve braking ability Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the alarm occurred gt Improve noise control F
292. ss value Running forward rotation Status REV Running reverse rotation STOP No output frequency SOUS of COMM Communication enabled RS 485 standard optional field bus option Operation Jogging mode Not applicable to FRENIC Eco HAND Keypad effective lights also in local mode Hz A V r min m min KW X10 min sec PID Indicators for the unit of number lt on the LED monitor Indicators for the running status lt and the source of command FWD REV STOP REM LOC COMM JOG HAND 3 3 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Eco features the following three operation modes E Running Mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming Mode This mode allows you to set function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm Mode If an alarm condition occurs the inverter automatically enters the Alarm Mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related information on the LED and LCD Monitors Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function For details refer to the FRENIC Eco Instruction Manual Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Protection Features Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Programming mode Run Stop of motor Setting of
293. ssible to use an external digital input signal as a DC braking command Tip ibaa DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque Chote In general specify data of the function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip a frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur 5 41 F23 F25 F26 F27 Starting Frequency Stop Frequency At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency The inverter stops its output at the stop frequency Set the starting frequency to a level that will enable the motor to generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency at the starting frequency F23 Cote If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as long as the frequency command does not exceed the stop frequency Output Frequency TA Starting Frequency No Stop Frequency F23 F25 Tim
294. st or water drops apparatus satisfied 2 Check if tools or other foreign matter 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or or dangerous objects are left around dangerous objects the equipment are left Voltage Check if the voltages of the main and Measure the voltages The standard control circuit are correct using a multimeter or specification must be the like satisfied 1 Check if the display is clear 1 2 1 2 2 Check if there is missing parts in the Visual inspection The display can be characters read and there is no fault Table 7 1 Continued Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Structure such 1 Abnormal noise and excessive 1 Visual or hearing 1 2 3 4 5 as frame and vibration inspection No aia ee cover 2 Loosen bolts tightened parts 2 Retighten 3 Deformation and breakage 3 4 5 4 Discoloration and deformation Visual inspection caused by overheat 5 Check for foulness and dust Common 1 Check if bolts and screws are tight 1 Retighten 1 2 3 and not missing No abnormalities 2 Check the devices and insulators for 2 3 deformation cracks breakage and Visual inspection discoloration caused by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for foulness and dust Conductor 1 Check the conductor for discoloration 1 2 1 2 and wire and distortion caused by overheat Visual inspection No abnormalities 2 Check the sheath of the cable for cracks and discolora
295. t Motor R1 Motor X These function codes specify no load current R1 and X Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor If you perform auto tuning these parameters are automatically set as well No load current Enter the value obtained from motor manufacturer e R1 Enter the value calculated by the following formula _ R1 Cable R1 R1 V 3x1 x 100 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A e X Enter the value calculated by the following formula X1 X2 x XM X2 XM Cable X X x 100 V1 V3 1 a where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A Cote For reactance choose the value at the base frequency F04 5 62 P99 H03 Motor Selection Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal motor overload protection uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the old motor p
296. t or injuries Do not get on a shipping box Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause injuries Wiring When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the recommended current range Use wires in the specified size Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge suppressor to the inverter s output Secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Doing so could cause fire or an accident Ge
297. t to Check and Suggested Measures Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal Check whether the frequency command source has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency command source or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire Refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay has a contact problem replace the relay Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is enabled gt Set P02 P03 and P06 properly and perform auto tuning in accordance with P04 gt Enable load selection for higher startup torque F37 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wire as short as possible Cancel the automatic control system automatic torque boost and energy saving operation F37 overload prevention control H70 and current limiter F43 then check that the motor vibration is suppressed gt Cancel the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the data of the oscillation suppression gain H80 currently set to appropriate values Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor
298. take External Air Intake Equipment Enclosure Figure 2 2 External Cooling 2 2 To utilize external cooling for inverters with a capacity of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above change the position of the top and bottom mounting bases from the edge to the center of the inverter as illustrated in Figure 2 3 Screws differ in size length and count for each inverter Be sure to refer to the table below Power supply voltage 3 phase 460 V Inverter type FRNO40F1S 2U to FRN100F1S 2U FRNOSOF1S 4U to FRN150F1S 4U FRN200F1S 4U to FRN350F1S 4U Base fixing screw Count M6 x 20 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides M6 x 20 3 pcs each for upper and lower sides M6 x 20 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides M5 x 16 4 pcs each for upper and lower sides Table 2 3 Screw Count and Tightening Torque Case fixing screw Count M6 x 12 3 pcs for upper side M6 x 12 3 pcs for upper side M6 x 20 2 pcs each for upper and lower sides M5 x 12 4 pcs each for upper and lower sides Tightening torque Nem 5 8 3 5 Refer to Figure A Figure B For models shown in Figure A Remove all of the base fixing screws from the top and bottom of the inverter Also remove the case fixing screws from the top The case fixing screws are not necessary in external cooling Store them for future use On the bottom are no case fixing screws Secure the top mounting base to th
299. tection Use an MCCB RCD GFCI or MC in conformity with EN or IEC standards When an RCD GFCI is used for protection of electric shock caused by a direct or indirect contact to the live parts insert a type B RCD GFCI in input lines primary of the inverter for the 3 phase 208 V or 460 V power source Use inverters in an environment that does not exceed pollution degree 2 If inverters are to be used in an environment with pollution degree 3 or 4 place them in an enclosure of IP54 or above To protect human body from an electric shock caused by a contact to live parts install inverters AC reactor and input output filter in the enclosure of IP2X In the case where human body easily contacts to live parts a top panel of the enclosure should be IP4X or higher Do not directly connect a copper wire to the grounding terminal Use a crimp terminal with tin or equivalent plating to connect the earth wire When using inverters at an altitude of more than 6600ft 2000 m note that the basic insulation applies to the insulation degree of the control circuitry At an altitude of more than 9800ft 3000 m inverters cannot be used vi Conformity with Low Voltage Directive in the EU continued ACAUTION 8 Use the wires listed in EN60204 1 Inverter type Power supply voltage Nominal applied motor HP 8 V FRNO20F1S 2U FRNO25F1S 2U FRNO30F1S 2U FRNO40F1S 2U FRNOSOF1S 2U FRNO60F1S 2U FRNO75F1S 2U 100 FRN100F1
300. tective cap Wire end terminal Figure 10 12 Point B 10 9 The wiring change in Note 1 can improve the EMC compliant level of the inverter for an environment or class however it increases the leakage currents listed in Table 10 1 to the ones listed below Make sure that these leakage currents are allowable for your system requirements beforehand EMC compliant oe current coor filter model Power supply voltage Inverter type Normal condition condition Worst condition condition FRN150F1S 4 gy ome FS5536 250 28 FRN200F18 4U 4U 3 phase 460 V NA 108 0 464 0 ooo o 4U FS5536 400 99 1 FRN350F1S 4U 4U For improvement in EMC compliance for 3 phase 208 V types of inverters consult your Fuji Electric representative for improving EMC compliant level 10 10 Designed For Fan and Pump Applications FRENIL ECO Instruction Manual First Edition June 2007 Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Fuji Electric Corp of America The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Eco series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the i
301. terminal signal line Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the power source side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC ON OFF manually Note When your system requires the motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV and or HLD or with the keypad E At the output Secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter Note As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s output side may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control system circuits to switch the motor drive power source
302. the 0 ev S0 key runs stops the motor 1 Digital input The terminal command FWD or REV runs stops the motor 2 Keypad Forward The 0 Gr08 key runs the motor forward or stops it but does not run it reverse 3 Keypad Reverse The Fev ro key runs the motor reverse or stops it but does not run it forward If you select Local by the Remote Local switching command operation of the run command from the keypad will be changed by setting of the function code F02 For details refer to mE Switching the operation mode between remote and local in 3 3 1 Running stopping the motor 3 6 2 Remote local operation The multi function keypad features the ae key to switch the operation between remote and local modes For details refer to E Switching the operation mode between remote and local in 3 3 1 Running stopping the motor 3 45 3 6 3 Tuning motor parameters The LCD monitor of multi function keypad shows the lead through screen for tuning of motor parameters To tune motor parameters follow screens below Entering into tuning motor parameters Set data 1 or 2 into the function code P04 and press the E key 0 DISABLE 0 2 AV DATA ADJUS Press AN V key to select the data either 1 or 2 being set to the function code P04 0O DISABLE H AT STOP O 2 AVPDATA ADJUS Press ae key to select the tuning mode Waiting for a run command 1 AT STOP START BY RUN COMMAND Turn on the Giv
303. the inverter entered automatic deceleration there may be a case that the motor does not stop or the frequency dose not decrease In this case cancel the automatic deceleration forcibly for safety and decelerate the motor according to the set deceleration time Prolong the deceleration time also Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the rate of decreasing the output frequency to prevent an overload condition Under this control an overload trip is prevented by decreasing the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips because of the overheating of the cooling fan or the overloading of the inverter with an alarm indication of Li or LiL This control is useful for facilities such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency goes low o0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 specified by F08 0 01 to 100 0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate 0 01 to 100 0 Hz s 99 Disable overload prevention control Cote In applications where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load this function is of no use and should not be enabled PID control feedback line disconnection detection protection After H91 is set from 0 1 to 60 0 and all of the condition as below are satisfied for set time CoF alarm comes ON When H91 is set to 0 0s CoF alarm does not com
304. the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An Alarm Occurrence i Inverter Turning Alarm Display on and No Alarm displayed Running Status Holding Alarm Stop and Ready to Run Alarm i Output ALM ON OFF i Min 10 ms C a Reset Alarm RST oF N E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to stop displays the alarm 4 and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Cip Use a trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in peripheral equipment E Switch frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this digital input signal ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 Hz1 F01 and frequency command 2 Hz2 C30 If nothing is assigned to this terminal command the frequency specified by F01 takes effect by Frequency command Frequency command source Hz2 Hz1 mae default OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ee Follow C30 Frequency command 2 E Enable DC brake DCBRkK Function code data 13 Turing this terminal co
305. the ambient temperature range from 10 to 50 C 14 to 122 F The heat sink of the inverter may become hot under certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Combina tion with peripheral devices Wiring Installing an MCCB or RCD GFCI Installing an MC in the secondary circuit Installing an MC in the primary circuit Protecting the motor Use of power factor correcting Capacitor Use of surge suppressor Measures against surge currents Megger test Control circuit wiring length Wiring length between inverter and motor Wiring type Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Ensure that the circuit breaker rated current is equivalent to or lower than the recommended rated current If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s output secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC ON or OFF Remove the magnet cont
306. the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter issues an alarm and stops the inverter output lt Alarm reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the Ge key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the data is written If E a memory error is detected the inverter stops L1 The inverter stops by detecting a communications error between the inverter and the keypad during operation using the keypad If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise or some other 7 factors this function stops the inverter Upon detection of an error in the communication between the inverter and an optional card stops the inverter output When an option card has detected an error this function stops the inverter output EE STOP key priority Pressing the S key on the keypad forces the inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is running by any run command given via the terminals or communications link After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm 4 4 Not applicable 8 18 Alarm output 30A B C Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Name Operation error detection T
307. the overload detection level 5 32 Example of Operating Characteristics l l l 1 Data NG ell A ER ENE DD l l l I I i l l I I l I a ae Se pie I l l l I I I I Sep She Se eS a eae l l pe Pee ae se lemme bem eee t UI J00 jo w BulAug 100 150 200 50 Actual Output Current Overload Detection Level x 100 5 33 F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Mode selection H13 Restart after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Frequency fall rate H16 Allowable momentary power failure time F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output of the inverter is shut down with undervoltage alarm 4 issued and the motor enters a coast to stop state Trip immediately Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level upon a momentary power failure the output of the inverter is shut down the motor enters a recovery from ry coast to stop state but no undervoltage alarm issued power failure Trip after a When power is restored an undervoltage alarm is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state 3 Enable restart When the
308. tilation Check the heat sink intake and exhaust Visual inspection No abnormalities path ports for clogging and foreign matter If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum cleaner 7 2 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Each part of the product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions It is recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified below When the replacement is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Part name Standard replacement intervals DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitor on the printed circuit board 10 years 10 years 5HP for 208V and 7HP for 460V or below Cooling fan 10 years 7 5HP for 208V and 10HP for 460V 7 years 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Fuse 10 years 125HP for 208V 125HP for 460V or above Note These replacement intervals are based on the estimated service life of the inverter at an ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F under 80 of full load In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C 104 F or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may need to be reduced 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a gu
309. ting the monitored data selected by function code F31 within the range of 0 to 200 Out of Scale F30 200 10 V 20 mA f 7777 77777 aan F30 100 e Output Voltage Current 3 SV 12mAy f Pian 1 F30 50 H 1 w E F30 0 j 0 V 4 MA 0 50 100 Meter Scale E Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to the analog output terminal FMA Function Meter scale Hala orea EMA output Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output Output frequency of the Maximum frequency F03 frequency inverter Output current SUED UR CUT ORE KSI G Twice the inverter rated current the inverter Output voltage RMS o 250 V for 200 V series Output voltage o inverter 500 V for 400 V series Output torque torque Motor shaft Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Twice the rated motor load or e Rated output torque of the Load factor Equivalent motor at the base frequency Load factor to the indication of the or below load meter e Rated motor output kW at the base frequency or above Input power of the Twice the rated output of the Input power i i inverter inverter PID feedback Feedback value under 5 value PV PID control 100 of the feedback value DC link bus DC link bus voltage of 500 V for 200 V series voltage the inverter 1000 V for 400 V series Command via communications link 10 Universal AO Refer to the RS 485 20 000 as 100 Communications User s Manual
310. tion Terminal Check that the terminals are not Visual inspection No abnormalities block Gamage Filtering Check for electrolyte leakage capacitor discoloration cracks and swelling of oe inspection ae abnormalities the case 2 Check if the safety valve does not protrude remarkably Main circuit 3 Measure the capacitance if 3 Measure discharge 3 The discharge time is necessary time with not shorter than time Capacitance probe specified by the replacement manual Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise and Hearing visual and No abnormalities and reactor odor smelling inspection Magnetic Check for chatters during operation Hearing inspection contactor Check for rough contacts 7 Visual inspection pe abnormalities and relay Printed 1 Check for loose screws and 1 Retighten 1 2 3 4 circuit board connectors 2 Smelling and visual No abnormalities 2 Check for odor and discoloration inspection 3 Check for cracks breakage 3 4 deformation and remarkable rust Visual inspection 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation Control circuit Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and 1 Hearing and visual 1 Smooth rotation excessive vibration inspection or turn 2 3 manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Check for loose bolts 2 Retighten 3 Check for discoloration caused by 3 Visual inspection overheat No abnormalities Cooling system Ven
311. tive running hours of the motor and inverter and the input watt hour ication Ind Item Explanation Remarks Output Transistor outputs quantity 3 Relay outputs quantity 1 form C and quantity 1 form A Voltage output 0 10 Vde Curent output 4 20 mA Displays the cause of trip by codes DC Overcurrent during acceleration Overcurrent during deceleration 10 3 Overcurrent during running at constant speed E Grounding fault i i Input phase loss E U Undervoltage PL Output phase loss OL Overvoltage during acceleration OLUE Qvervoltage during deceleration OU J OQvervoltage during running at constant speed OH Overheating of the heat sink QHO External alarm HJ inverter overheat HH Motor protection PTC thermistor Motor overload E L inverter overload I S Blown fuse PE Charging circuit fault i Memory error E r c Keypad communication error J CPU error E H Optional communication error E G Option error E G Operation action error Er Tuning error E r G RS 485 communication error rE Data save error due to undervoltage Er p RS 485 communication error option Er H LS error Saves and displays the last 4 trip error codes and their detailed description Trip error code csr Indication CJC PEATA 1 a A a i Tripe history Refer to Section 6 6 Protective Functions Refer to Chapter 1 Sectio
312. to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 6 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor No alarm code appears on the LED monitor Abnormal motor operation Go to Section 6 2 1 1 The motor does not rotate 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 If the speed variation and current vibration such as hunting occur at the constant speed 5 If grating sound can be heard 6 The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time 7 Even if the power recovers after an instantaneous power failure the motor does not restart Problems with inverter settings Go to Section 6 2 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 The desired menu
313. tput current An abnormally high current has been caused during tuning During tuning the Run command has been turned OFF or forced STOP Sequence error coast to stop command BX dew condensation protection DWP or a similar abnormal command has been received During tuning a certain limitation has been reached or exceeded Limitation exceeded The maximum output frequency or the peak limiter for output frequency has been reached or exceeded Other alarm condition An undervoltage or an alarm has been occurred If any of these conditions has occurred either eliminate the abnormal or error factor s and perform tuning again or contact your Fuji Electric representative Not If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter OFL OO0 4A is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit the result of tuning can be unpredictable When you replace an inverter take note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 the leakage reactance X and the no load current and set those values to the new inverter s function codes 4 1 4 Test run If the user set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Eco User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions of the previous Section 4 1 1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on to Section 4 1
314. ts PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 35 1035 Select local keypad operation LOC 38 1038 Enable to run RE Protect motor from dew condensation DWP Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 50 Hz ISW50 Enable integrated sequence to switch to commercial power 60 Hz ISW60 50 1050 Clear periodic switching time MCLR 51 1051 Enable pump drive motor 1 MEN1 52 1052 Enable pump drive motor 2 MEN2 53 1053 Enable pump drive motor 3 MEN3 54 1054 Enable pump drive motor 4 MEN4 87 1087 Switch run command 2 1 FR2 FR1 88 Run forward 2 FWD2 89 Run reverse 2 REV2 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Note In the case of THR and STOP data 1009 and 1030 are for normal logic and 9 and 30 are for negative logic respectively 5 11 Data Default copying setting C codes Control Functions of Frequency Change je copying seting running C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 120 0 c02 2 C03 3 C04 Band 0 0 to 30 0 ojej y y 30 _ lt lt a p lt lt C05 Multistep Frequency 1 0 00 to 120 00 1 om z EAKA om EAKAS cos s KAKAK on s EAEAN C30 Frequency Command 2 Enable WN I V keys on keypad 5 23 Enable voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC Enable current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC Enable sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1
315. ult in the formation of condensation or ice Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa in storage 70 to 106 kPa during transportation 1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like 2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 Ifthe inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage methods are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 30 C 14 to 56 F This is to prevent the electr
316. unction codes together with their data that have been changed The function codes whose data have been changed from factory default are marked with By selecting a function code and pressing the amp key you can view or change its data LCD screen transition from the 2 DATA CHECK menu is the same as with 1 DATA SET except for the different screen listing function codes as shown below Function code Changed Function code data WEJ 48 OHz WoE 48 OHz meme 195 V DF wii ois AV Figure 3 13 LCD Screen Listing Function Codes Basic key operation Same as the basic key operation for 1 DATA SET 3 17 3 4 4 Monitoring the running status 3 OPR MNTR Menu 3 OPR MNTR allows you to check the running status during maintenance and test running The display items for Drive Monitoring are listed in Table 3 9 Table 3 9 Drive Monitoring Display Items ce t o few Fref Frequency Frequency command command Running direction FWD Forward REV Reverse Blank Stopped Running status Running status IL Current limitation LU Undervoltage VL Voltage limitation Motor shaft speed Display value Output frequency Hz x a LoD Load shaft speed Display value Output frequency Hz x Function code E50 w o o i ea O oo PID process The PID process command and PID feedback value are displayed after command converting the value to a virtual physical value e g temperature or pressure of the object
317. uning error detection RS 485 communi cations error detection Data save error during undervoltage RS 485 communi cations error detection LSI error detection Power PCB Retry Surge protection Command loss detected Protection against momentary power failure Overload prevention control Description Start check function The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays 4 4 on the 7 segment LED monitor if any run command is present when Powering up An alarm is released the S key is turned ON or an alarm reset RST is input Enable communications link LE has been activated and the run command is active in the linked source During tuning of motor parameters the tuning has failed or has aborted or an abnormal condition has been detected in the tuning result the inverter stops its output When the inverter is connected to a communications network via the RS 485 port designed for the keypad detecting a communications error stops the LI l inverter output and displays an error code If the data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage protection function the inverter displays the alarm code When the inverter is connected to a communications network via RS 485 communications card detecting a communications error stops the inverter mo EF output and displays an error code 27r When an error occurred in the LSI on the power printed circuit boa
318. upply switching connectors CN R and CN W for the models of 208 V 50HP or above 460 V 75HP or above CN W White Connector configuration Power When using the terminals R1 T1 When using no terminal R1 T1 system e Feeding the DC linked power Factory default operation e Combined with a PWM converter Figure 2 16 Reconfiguration of the CN UX CN R and CN W Connectors 2 21 DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters 4 Note Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T three phase input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD a ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection Tir It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supp
319. uto energy saving operation will be invalid e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency F04 the rated voltage at base frequency F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P01 through PO3 and POG through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning per P04 5 30 F10 to F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Select motor characteristics Overload detection level and Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Cnote Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal motor overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00 E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor built in cooling fan or externally powered forced ventilation fan 1 For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation 2 For inv
320. verse operation ee E Interlock IL Function code data 22 In a configuration where a magnetic contactor MC is installed in the power output secondary circuit of the inverter the momentary power failure detection feature provided inside the inverter may not be able to accurately detect a momentary power failure by itself Using a digital signal input with the interlock command IL assures the accurate detection No momentary power failure has occurred Amomentary power failure has occurred Restart after a momentary power failure enabled For details of operation after a recovery from momentary power failure refer to the description of function code F14 E Enable communications link via RS 485 or field bus option LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 or the field bus option y98 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON For details of switching refer to H30 Communications link function and y98 Bus link function 5 50 WE Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS 485 communications link or a field bus option by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not o
321. verter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS 485 communications link standard or option or field bus option H30 is for the RS 485 communications link and y98 for the field bus Using the communications link function allows you to monitor the operation information of the inverter and the function code data set frequency commands and issue run commands from a remote location LE Selected Inside Inverter Command Standard RJ 45 If no LE is assigned the Command Source will be selected Option Card Option Card by H30 and or y98 Field Bus Option Command sources selectable Command sources Description Sources except RS 485 communications link and field bus Frequency command source Specified by F01 and C30 or multistep frequency command Run command source Via the keypad or digital input terminals Inverter itself Via RS 485 communications link Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad standard Via RS 485 communications link Via RS 485 communications link option card option card Via field bus option using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or Via field bus option PROFIBUS DP 5 69 Command sources specified by H30 Data for H30 Frequency command Run command Inverter itself FO1 C30 Inverter itself F02 1 Via RS 485 communications link inverter itself F02 standard Inverter itself F01 C30 Via RS 485 communications link standard Via RS 485 communications
322. was unable to save data such as the frequency commands and PID process command set through the keypad when the power was switched off Possible Causes 1 3 The control circuit voltage dropped suddenly while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF because the DC link bus was rapidly discharged A high intensity noise affected the operation of the inverter while data was being saved when the power was turned OFF The control circuit failed What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus electricity After pressing the amp 5 key and releasing the alarm set using a remote keypad the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID process command back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Pra gt Improve noise control After pressing the amp key and releasing the alarm set using a remote keypad the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands and PID process command back to the original values and then restart the operation Check if occurs each time power is switched on gt This problem was caused
323. wer has been turned off E Setting up the slide switches Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB allows you to customize the operation mode of the analog output terminals digital I O terminals and communications ports The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2 29 To access the slide switches remove the front and terminal block covers so that you can watch the control PCB For models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above open also the keypad enclosure For a screw terminal base close the control circuit terminal symbol plate since the plate being opened interferes with switching of some switches For details on how to remove the front cover terminal block cover and keypad enclosure refer to Section 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block TB cover and the front cover and Chapter 1 Section 1 2 External View and Terminal Blocks Figure 1 4 Table 2 11 lists function of each slide switch Table 2 11 Function of Each Slide Switch M SW1 Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE To make the digital input terminal X1 to X5 FWD or REV serve as a current sink turn SW 1 to the SINK position To make them serve as a current source turn SW1 to the SOURCE position Factory default SINK SW3 Switches the terminating resistor of RS 485 communications port on the inverter on and off To connect a keypad to the inverter turn SW3 to OFF Fa
324. wer is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock ACAUTION e Do not turn the main circuit power circuit breaker ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means Injuries could occur Setting control switches e Before setting up any internal control switches turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above Make sure that the LED monitor and charging lamp on models of 40HP for 208V SOHP for 460V or above are turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe voltage 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement e Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes for models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or below or ten minutes for models of 40HP for 208V 50HP for 460V or above before starting inspection Further check that the LED monitor a
325. will be ignored Factory settings For models of 25HP for 208V 30HP for 460V or below the non linear V f is disabled H50 0 H51 0 For models of 30HP for 208V 40HP for 460V or above it is enabled that is H50 5 Hz H51 20 V for the 208 V H50 5 Hz H51 40 V for 460 V F Rated Rated input voltage unction cod Name capacity HP 208 V 460 V Base Frequency 7 5 to 100 50 0 Hz 50 0 Hz Rated Voltage 7 5 to 100 208 V 460 V at Base Frequency ok O H Z Frequency Non linear V f Pattern 40 or below Voltage Non linear V f Pattern 40 or below 5 26 Example E Normal linear V f pattern Output voltage V Constant Constant torque output range range Rated voltage m at base frequency F05 i Output 0 Base Maximum frequency Hz frequency frequency F04 F03 E f Pattern with Non linear Point below the Base Frequency Output voltage V Rated voltage at base frequency F05 Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 Output 0 Non linear Base frequency Hz V f pattern frequency Frequency F04 H50 E f Pattern with Non linear Point above the Base Frequency Output voltage V Non linear V f pattern Voltage H51 Rated voltage at base frequency FQ5 Output 0 Base Non linear frequency Hz frequency V f pattern F04 Frequency H50 5 27 F07 F08 F09 F37 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 FO7 specifies the acceleratio
326. y primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together frequency noise through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times ACL If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 65 6ft 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply primary lines if it is more than 65 6ft 20 m insert it to the power output secondary lines of the inverter EMC compliant A special filter for making the inverter in conformity with Europe s EMC directives filter AC Reactor e This optional feature must be connected to the primary side commercial power supply ACR side of the inverter when the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply is 2 to 3 Max voltage V Min voltage V x6 3 phase average voltage V In case the inter phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply exceeds 3 you would need to take other measures such as increasing the capacity of the inverter Contact your Fuji Electric representative In a DC link bus system using terminals P and N the AC reactor protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current Voltage unbalance 7 9 3 he Name of option Function and application External An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer potentiometer for to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter frequency commands Multi function Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter i
327. y commands can be switched between Remote and Local modes by the Ge key on the keypad This key is a toggle switch Each time you press it for more than 1 second the mode switches from Romote to Local or vice versa The mode can be switched also by an external digital input signal To enable the switching you need to assign LOC to one of the digital input terminals which means that the commands from the keypad are given precedence one of function codes E01 to E05 E98 or E99 must be set to 35 By factory default LOC is assigned to X5 You can confirm the current mode on the indicators REM Remote mode LOC Local mode When the mode is switched from Remote to Local the frequency settings in the Remote mode are automatically inherited Further if the inverter is in Running mode at the time of the switching from Remote to Local the Run command is automatically turned ON so that all the necessary data settings will be carried over If however there is a discrepancy between the settings on the keypad and those on the inverter itself e g switching from reverse rotation in the Remote mode to forward rotation in the Local mode using the keypad that is for forward rotation only the inverter automatically stops The paths of transition between Remote and Local modes depend on the current mode and the value ON OFF of LOC the signal giving precedence to the commands from the keypad as shown in the state transition diagram Fi
328. ystem of the motor is operating normally motor malmncioned gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Lighten the load e g lighten the load before overload occurs using the overload early warning E34 function In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound carrier frequency F26 6 12 Possible Causes 4 The set activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was inadequate A PTC thermistor and pull up resistor were connected incorrectly or the resistance was inadequate The value set for the torque boost F09 was too high The V f pattern did not match the motor Wrong settings What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Reconsider the data of function code H27 Check the connection and the resistance of the pull up resistor gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an appropriate resistance Check the data of function code F09 and readjust the data so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data to a lower value gt Readjust the data of the function code F09 Check if the base frequency F04 and rated voltage at base frequency F05 match the values on the nameplate on the motor gt Match the function c

Instruction Manual - Galco Industrial Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents